Home

CC-Link IE Field Network Interface Board User's Manual(For

1. CC Link IE Field Network board Inside the control panel 20 to 30cm For details on the AD75CK refer to the following J AD75CK type Cable Clamping Instruction Manual 4 Noise filter power supply line filter Noise filter is effective for reducing conducted noise in the 10MHz or less frequency Use of a noise filter can suppress noise The installation precautions are described below e Do not bundle the cables on the input side and output side of the noise filter If bundled the output side noise will be induced into the filtered cable on the input side Input side Input side power supply side power supply side Induction Filter E Output side device side Output side device side Noise will be induced when the input Separately install the input and and output cables are bundled output cables S3ALLO3YIA ADVLIOA MOT ANY OWS v xipuaddy e Ground the ground terminal of the noise filter to the ground point of the control panel with the shortest ground wire possible approximately 10cm 3119911 SBEeyoA MOT y YUM jdwo 0 SAINSEIN Zp XIpuaddy Appendix 14 2 Measures to comply with the Low Voltage Directive The CC Link IE Field Network board is out of the requirement for conformance to the Low Voltage Directive since it does not use the power supply in the range of 50 to 1000V AC and 75 to 1500V DC 211 Appendix 15External Dimensions Appendix 15 1 aso0BD 37
2. o oooooooonronronnor eee 131 12 2 3 Help function 132 12 3 Selecting Monitoring Method o o o oooo eee eens 133 12 3 1 Batch monitoring devices 46212004 veces rendida 133 12 3 2 Monitoring registered 16 point devices 2 0 0 0 ccc ence eee 134 12 4 Setting Monitoring Target 1 0 0 0 ee eee nnn 135 12 5 Setting Devices to be Monliored lt 3 cios o da on dace ovens 136 126 Changing Current Values gt dorar cee ee ad OTe eRe be DA 137 12 6 1 Changing word device Values 0 0 00 ccc ttn eee e tenes 137 12 6 2 Turning bit devices ON and OFF 1 1 1 ct tenes 138 12 Switching Display Formal 22acat0 rider 139 12 8 Using Numerical Pad 141 CHAPTER 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 142 181 Diagnosing Boardss criar Bes Soe ee Gah See Soe wee ae ere ae 142 13 2 Diagnosing CC Link IE Field Network ooooooooooo ooo 144 13 2 1 Selecting the diagnostics target 0 0 0 ct teens 144 13 2 2 Displaying diagnostics Screen 0 tenet n ee es 145 12 CHAPTER 14 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY CHAPTER 15 PROGRAMMING 15 1 16 1 16 3 16 4 16 5 16 6 16 7 13 2 3 13 2 4 13 2 5 13 2 6 13 2 7 13 2 8 Communication TOS ts 0 6 3 4 due d sf dl era daa a dada da en Bae eee CADIS NSS A A NN Dink SIAU SlOb sss han emi ee aes parte 258 da As 1 AO a ass Network event NISO iio Reserved station function enable 0 0 ccc eee tenes Enable Disable ignore station erro
3. Each bit corresponds to 1 bit of RY Buffer memory b15 b14 b13 b412 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO addresses RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY ss REE 2047 07FFH AY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY 3FFF 3FFE 3FFD 3FFC 3FFB 3FFA 3FF9 3FF8 3FF7 3FF6 3FF5 3FF4 3FF3 3FF2 3FF1 3FFO 218 APPENDIX 3 Remote register RWw Address 2048 to 10239 0800H to 27FFH The areas to store the value of RWw The RWw start number and number of points for each station number can be checked by the RWw offset size information gt Page 221 Appendix 2 2 3 Buffer memory b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO addresses 2048 0800 A a o O RE O 4 Remote register RWr Address 10240 to 18431 2800H to 47FFH The areas to store the value of RWr The RWr start number and number of points for each station number can be checked by the RWr offset size information gt Page 221 Appendix 2 2 4 Buffer memory b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO addresses 10240 2800H RWr0 ASH 5 Link special relay SB Address 18432 to 18463 4800H to 481FH The areas to store the value of SB NY Each bit corresponds to 1 bit of SB Buffer memory b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO addresses sg sg sB se se se se se se se se se se se sB
4. icon when the target station is disconnected 153 usalos sonsouBelp BulAejdsig ZZE MIOMION PI 4 31 AUINT 90 Buisoubeig ze Screen button e Error buttons An error button is displayed when an error occurs on the CC Link IE Field Network board or connection cable The Error details screen is displayed by clicking the button e Station No Setting button This button is displayed when a station number is not specified for the selected station The Station number setting screen for changing the station number is displayed by clicking the button Selected Station Communication Status Monitor LJ72GF15 2 i MAC Address al Station No Setting 154 CHAPTER 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS a Specifying station number Specify a station number for the station number unspecified station when the connected station is a master station Screen display XO Diagnostics lt gt CC IE Field Diagnostics c gt CC IE Field Network Diagnostics screenc gt _ Station No Setting button Set Station No MAC Address of select station Station No for setting Corcel Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description MAC Address of select station Display the MAC address of the selected station Specify a station number Station No for settin Setting range 1 to 120 numerals 0 to 9 in 3 digits only 2 Clickthe button Point O Adding a st
5. sjoafo1g Bumoedufn pue uoissaidwoy ym sjosloig Buines y 6 Enter the folder where the compressed file is saved and the compressed file name The Compressed File Name compressed file name can be specified in the Compressed File Name screen by clicking the _ Browse button 2 Clickthe mrss button The compressed project file ifz is saved in the specified folder 105 2 Unpacking projects saved with compression Unpack a project saved with compression Screen display Project gt Compress Unpack gt Unpack lez Unpack Source Setting Compressed File Name L Documents and Settings XP My Documents Project1 ifz Browse Ta Unpack Destination Project Workspace Folder Path L Documents and Settings XP My Documents Browse Workspace Project List a Workspace2 Workspace Name Workspace Project Name Project1 Unpack and Open Close Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Unpack Source Setting Enter the folder drive path in which the compressed file to be unpacked is saved and the compressed file name Compressed File Name The compressed file name can be specified in the Compressed File Name screen by clicking the Browse button Unpack Destination Project Enter the folder drive path to which the project to be unpacked is saved Workspace Folder Path The folder can be selected in the Browse For Folder s
6. 41 Address Decimal Initial Read write Refer to value Hexadecimal 20544 Manufacturer code 5040H 20545 Model type 50411 Page 223 Read 20546 Other station station No 1 Appendix 2 4 Model code 5042H network card information 20547 Version 5043H 20548 to 20551 System area 5044H to 5047H 20552 Controller information valid 5048H invalid flag 20553 Manufacturer code 50494 20554 Model type 504AH 20555 Page 223 Model code Read 504Bh Other station station No 1 Appendix 2 4 20556 controller information Version 504ChH 20557 to 20566 Model name string 504DH to 5056H 20567 to 20568 Vendor specific device 5057H to 5058H information 20569 to 20575 System area 5059H to 505FH 20576 to 24383 Other station information ae Same as other station information station No 1 5060H to 5F3FH station No 2 to No 120 24384 to 32767 System area E 5F40H to 7FFFH Poi oint Do not write data to System area Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system 42 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4 1 Procedure Before Operation This section explains the procedure before operating the CC Link IE Field Network board y Install the software package I Page 88 Section 6 2 Install the software package on a personal computer Install the board lt Page 49 Section 4 3 4 Install the boar
7. A Station No 2 CC Link IE Field Network Network No 1 o N Rayo station 2 Station Station No 2 No 3 target A4 AA e e e CC Link IE Field Network Routing parameters for stations of network No 1 Target Network Relay Network Relay o o Station No No 3 because data are transmitted No setting is required for station via the station itself Routing parameters for stations of network No 2 No setting is required for station No 0 because data are transmitted via the station itself Relay Station No No setting is required for station No 2 because data are transmitted via the station itself Routing parameters for stations of network No 3 Target Network Relay Network No No 3 Relay Station No No setting is required for station No 3 because data are transmitted via the station itself Start Utility on the computer where CC Link IE Field Network board is installed Set the routing parameters on the Routing Parameter Setting screen as shown in the figure to left lt _ gt Page 121 Section 10 2 7 Write the network parameters being set to the CC Link IE Field Network board Online lt gt Write to Board Reset the specified board Onli
8. Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repai
9. 896 points 2048 points Communication Selectable from 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 1Gbos speed 5Mbps 10Mbps ene CAECCA NE An Ethernet cable that meets the 1000BASE T standard Category 5e or higher double shielded STP straight cable gt Page 33 Section 2 4 1 RWr RX Y Connection cable e CC Link dedicated high performance cable e Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable 100m maxi Compliant with ANSI TIA EIA 568 B Category 5e L gt Page 56 Section 4 6 2 Line topology 12000m when connected to 1 master station and 120 slave stations 1200m at transmission speed of 156kbps Star topology Depends on the system configuration Ring topology 12100m when connected to 1 master station and 120 slave stations Network Buetosdie Line topology star topology Coexistence of line topology ai topology and star topology is possible ring topology Maximum E 30cm to 1200m varies depending on Transmission station to ess a i connected stations and transmission speed specifications station distance Total distance 110MJ9N PIO 31 XUT pue yun 99 jo uosWedwoy xipueddy Number of Master etan 1 station up to 64 remote stations can be 1 station up to 120 slave stations can be connected aster station connected connected to master station to master station stations in one Local station 26 stations 120 stations network Station type Master station local station Communication me
10. Number Description Master Local station station Turns ON when a cyclic transmission start request by System link start SB0002 is accepted OFF Not accepted SB0002 is OFF System link start SB0054 ON Start accepted SB0002 is ON request accept status Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Turns ON when the System link start request accept status SB0054 turns ON and cyclic transmission start is completed OFF Start not completed SBO002 is OFF System link start SB0055 ON Start completed SBO002 is ON completion status Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Turns ON when a cyclic transmission stop request by System link stop SB0003 is accepted OFF Not accepted SB0003 is OFF System link stop SB0056 ON Stop accepted SBO003 is ON request accept status Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Turns ON when the System link stop accept status SB0056 turns ON and cyclic transmission stop is completed OFF Stop not completed SB0003 is OFF System link stop SB0057 ON Stop completed SB0003 is ON x completion status Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Turns ON when the Temporary error invalid request SB0010 is accepted Temporary error invalid SB0058 OFF Not accepted SB0010 is OFF reque
11. Point To check which system in the Redundant CPU system is being accessed by the CC Link IE Field Network board create a program to monitor the following special relays The flag status does not change even if the tracking cable is disconnected O When checking which system is being accessed System A or System B At the time of TRK CABLE ERR Link Special Relay System A System B Error code 6120 occurrence System not determined SM1511 System A identification flag SM1512 ee OFF ON OFF System B identification flag When checking the operation system status OFF At the time of TRK CABLE ERR Error code 6120 occurrence Control Standby Link Special Relay system system System not determined SM1515 ON OFF OFF Control system judgment flag SM1516 OFF ON OFF Standby system judgment flag 3 Retry processing for error that occurs during system switching processing When the MELSEC data link library is used to access the Redundant CPU during system switching being processed by the Redundant CPU a system switching error error code 4248H CPU starting error error code 40045 other system CPU module error error code 4245H access destination illegal error error code FFDFH or similar error occurs In this case create a user program that checks the error code and performs retry processing as necessary a The following indicates the functions that result in error if executed d
12. Stores the baton pass status for the own station transient transmission possible OFF Normal ON Error If an error occurs the cause of the error can be checked by the Baton pass status own station SW0047 and Cause of baton pass interruption O SW0048 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the Baton pass status own station SW0047 and Cause of baton pass interruption SW0048 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan Number SB0049 SB004A SB004B SB004C SB004D SB0050 SB0051 SB0052 SB0053 Data link status own station Own station s CPU status 1 Own station s CPU status 2 CPU RUN status own station Received parameter error Link start request accept status own station Link start completion status own station Link stop request accept status own station Link stop completion status own station Description Stores the own station s data link status OFF Normal ON Error If an error occurs the cause of the error can be checked by Cause of data link stop SW0049 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the Cause of data link stop SW0049 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan Stores the continuation error status of the own station s CPU module OFF Normal ON Continuation error Stores the stop error status of the own station s CPU module OFF Normal ON Stop error Stores the RUN status of the own station s
13. 0000 00 00 00 00 00 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 4 SS a ennai E Clear Event History History Acquisition Setting Create CSY File Network Event History Display the list of network event history Network Event History List Each column can be sorted in ascending descending order by clicking on the column header Detailed Information Display the detailed information of an event selected in Network Event History List Poi oint The number of displayed events Up to 1000 events can be displayed When the maximum is reached the events will be erased in sequence from the oldest one and the latest events will be displayed AJO SIY JUBAD YIOMJON 9 Z EL YIOMIJON PIa 31 4UIT OD Buisoubeiq zE O Saving event history data Event history data are deleted by power cycling the system To hold event history data store them in a CSV file O Sorting event history data Click each title to sort events Network Event History Collection Target Whole Network Network No 1 Network Event History List ep MU A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A nl a I T Event occurrence date and time Event detected station _ GE Click 2011 01 07 14 57 30 Master Station lt lt Own 5t gt gt Error Error code of the own station 2011 01 07 14 56 11 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change
14. CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 7 4 Checking operation environment Check if the supported operating system and functions are used Check Corrective action Is the operating system written in Operating e Use a personal computer on which the supported operating system is Environment 37 Page 34 Section 2 5 Used installed Is a programming language written in Operating Create a user program using a supported programming language Environment Page 34 Section 2 5 used e For precautions when using MELSEC data link library refer to the for a user program using MELSEC data link following manual library LAMELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual Are the functions written in The functions cannot be used K Page 34 Section 2 5 e Change the settings for the unsupported functions in Operating Environment set Is the personal computer logging on as a user A oa l e Log on as a user with administrator authority with administrator authority 16 7 5 Checking personal computer and operating system Check if the personal computer or operating system has any problem Check Corrective action Is the power supply ensured e Check the power outlet and power cable of the personal computer e Change the installation location of the board e Check the resource acquisition status of other board and change the resource on the BIOS setting screen or Device Manager screen e Reinstall the driver of the other optional boards e Repl
15. e Operation of a device driver such as a graphic board e Operation of other software applications If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to K Page 198 Section 16 8 1 6 4 3 Driver does not start When the driver does not start normally check the following items Item Corrective action Is the board installed properly e Check the board installation status Page 186 Section 16 7 2 Is the channel number set properly e Check the channel number K Page 191 Section 16 7 8 Is the software package installed e Reinstall the software package Page 169 Section 16 2 1 If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to K Page 198 Section 16 8 D D SS Noa 16 4 4 Bus error q E lt O 2 0 S 3 i O When the bus error occurred check the following items a lt Item Corrective action 29 UU Is the board installed properly Check the board installation status Page 186 Section 16 7 2 Q Does the board operate on other personal After formatting the HD install the operating system again x computer Repair or replace the personal computer a U O If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to K Page 198 Section 16 8 179 16 5 Troubleshooting for Data Link The following shows the troubleshooting for error for the data link on the network e Communication error ERR LED is ON Flashing Page 180 Section 16 5 1 e User program cannot be acc
16. ee a K gt Page 133 Section 12 3 L gt Page 136 Section 12 5 L gt Page 137 Section 12 6 Completion 128 CHAPTER 12 MONITORING 3 Menu list The following explains the functions of Device Monitor Utility Menu Reference Batch monitor Batch monitor one type of devices Page 133 Section 12 3 1 16 point register monitor Monitor multiple devices simultaneously in units of 16 points Page 134 Section 12 3 2 Exit Exit Device Monitor Utility Page 130 Section 12 2 1 Setting Reference Network setting Set a programmable controller CPU or board to be monitored Page 135 Section 12 4 Device setting Set devices to be monitored Page 136 Section 12 5 Device Write Reference Data Changing Change the word device value Page 137 Section 12 6 1 Continuous Change in Data Change the sequenced word devices to the same value Bit Device Set Turn ON the specified bit devices Page 138 Section 12 6 2 Bit Device Reset Turn OFF the specified bit devices Data Format Reference Word device Display format Change the display format of word devices Page 139 Section 12 7 Bit device Display format Change the display format of bit devices Options Reference Numerical Pad Enable disable the setting to use the numerical pad Page 141 Section 12 8 Help Reference Help Display Help Page 132 Section 12 2 3 Version Display product information such as a product version AWN JOYUO BD ABq JO MAINMSA
17. 12 8 Using Numerical Pad This section explains the option function for entering numerals A numerical pad allows numeric values such as device values to be entered only with the mouse operation 1 Enabling disabling numerical pad Operating procedure 1 D Options gt Numerical Pad After the setting a numerical pad is displayed by clicking a numeric value input field The setting is disabled by selecting this menu again 2 Entering values using numerical pad Screen display O Click a numeric value input field on a screen Numerical Pad A anua E E ES EA EA Operating procedure 1 Click the buttons and enter a value 2 Clickthe K button The value is entered in the numeric value input field ped jedawnN Buisn 8 z1 141 CHAPTER 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS This chapter explains the methods for diagnosing the board or CC Link IE Field Network status using CC IE Field Utility 13 1 Diagnosing Board This section explains a method for checking the board status Display contents KO Diagnostics gt Board Diagnostics Board Diagnostics Link Refresh ms 1 1 182 Offline No error Board Information Channel No 182 v Model Name Q81BD J71GF11 T2 Product 121220000000000 B Mode Bus I F Test v Start Test Information Board Test Test Result Bus I F Test was normaly completed Close Diagnostics CC IE Field diagnosis screen is displayed Display
18. CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions N i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in e Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT e Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is requi
19. Display contents W View gt Network Parameter gt CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting screen gt Network Configuration Setting gt Network Configuration Setting screen gt button Loopback Function Setting Use Please build network configuration ring configuration that the end stations of Line Connection are connected to each other Block Data Assurance per Station JV Assure Block Data Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Link scan is executed asynchronously with the link refresh which is executed by the CC Link Scan Mode Settin 9 Link IE Field Network board driver Check the check box and set the constant link scan time Constant Link Scan Setting range 1 to 200 Loopback Function Setting Select whether to use the loopback function Use Page 85 Section 5 8 To configure a network in ring topology select this check box Block Data Assurance per Select whether to assure data integrity on a station basis in link refresh between the driver Station and the board 2 Clickthe ed _ button 114 CHAPTER 10 SETTING PARAMETERS a Link scan mode setting The constant link scan can be set by checking the check box Set this item to perform cyclic transmission at constant intervals Link scan will be performed by the interval set in this item However when the actual link scan time is longer than constant link scan time cyclic transmissio
20. NATA T Cable side connector fo ae Patch cord removal tool BULIM 9 p suolnedeid BUI 19 99 4 6 2 Ethernet cable connection 1 Connecting the cable 1 Turn off a personal computer to which the CC Link IE Field Network board is installed and the connected device 2 Push the Ethernet cable connector into the CC Link IE Field Network board and connected device until it clicks Pay attention to the connector s direction Turn on the personal computer A Turn on the connected device 5 Check whether the LINK LED of the port connected with an Ethernet cable is on The time between the power on and the LINK LED turning on may vary The LINK LED usually turns on in a few seconds Note however that the time may be extended further if the linkup process is repeated depending on the status of the device on the line If the LINK LED does not turn on refer to the troubleshooting LINK LED section and take a corrective action gt Page 166 CHAPTER 16 Point PORT1 and PORT2 need not to be distinguished When only one connector is used in star topology either one of the PORT1 and PORT2 can be used Either one can be used When using two connectors for line topology and ring topology an Ethernet cable can be connected to the connectors in any combination For example the cable can b
21. Page 56 Section 4 6 2 b Connector part LED Display the link status and reception status of the CC Link IE Field Network board Name Status Description e The module received abnormal data e The board is performing loopback ER OFF e The module received normal data e The board does not perform loopback Tic Linkup in progress OFF Linkdown in progress CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4 3 Installation This section explains precautions for handling and installation environment of the CC Link IE Field Network board 4 3 1 Handling precautions The following explains precautions for handling 1 Precautions for turning on e Do not touch any connectors while power is on Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunction 2 Handling precautions of the board e Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the board Doing so may cause malfunction or failure of the board Do not disassemble or modify the board Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or fire Before handling the board touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the board to fail or malfunction Handle the board in a place where static electricity will not be generated Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction The board is included in an antistatic envelope When storing or transporting it be sure to put it
22. Project gt New ja CC IE Field Utility Unset project Network Parameter CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting i Project Edit View Online Diagnostics Window Help DPE 06 05 eee ss SS eed Board 2 Board 4 Total Stations Necessary Setting No Setting f Already Set Set if itis needed No Setting Already Set Routing Parameters Check End Cancel sjoalo1g Bunea 16 Point O Creating a new project with data read from the board A new project is created with the data read from the CC Link IE Field Network board when data are read from the board before creating a new project For reading data from board 5 Page 125 Section 11 2 O A note on creating a new project Do not change the storage location or file name of created workspace or project folder file using an application such as Windows Explorer 101 9 2 Opening Existing Projects Read a project saved in a hard disk or other memory media of a personal computer Screen display Project gt Open Open Project Save Folder Path L Documents and Settings xP My Documents Browse Workspace Project List Cancel Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Enter the folder drive path where the workspace is saved Save Folder Path The folder can be selected in the Browse For Folder screen by clicking the Browse button Select a workspace Workspace Project List
23. SEND RECV FUACION arta a a Be Bee on bios 15 5 5 Reserved Station Specification and Reserved Station Function Disable Function 82 5 6 Error Invalid Station and Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting Function 83 BP SEVERE UNCON tan fee e a a o e dl e OS O aleve ca 84 5 8 LOODDACK FUNCION estirada td a a eo a 85 59 Driver WDT function 86 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES 87 6 1 Installation and Uninstallation Precautions auaa aaaea es 87 62 installations pi a e ekg a e e Gea oO nd eL Dd de eee 88 63 Uninstalatio s cc csiee oe eed erario ba aia ee 90 CHAPTER 7 OVERVIEW OF CC IE FIELD UTILITY 91 TA AA A NN 91 25 Mentiiiisterios dra a ds e ld a ds tl Eb Ei eed Be ii Sea eee 92 CHAPTER 8 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 94 81 Staning and EXN gt ota doo od oo iia ad OS ee daa 94 8 2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations anana aaaea ea e ene 95 8 2 1 Mainframe Configuration execs heb he eee abe kde eee bad oca oe es 95 S22 o e St teats a aa ata ae Wee Ge a ein Be etn oe Be Gee ek ene 96 8237 gt WOREWIRdOWS psa Sc Aliens ge eee lated ek one ek te ste ten dad in dos 98 93 Hep FUNCION tt tee ae Reet we Delos ad dd 100 CHAPTER 9 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 101 Ou Creating Proje E seremoni Koo ae ia hence de ea sd Syeda dees hod Sede ee 101 92 Opening Existing Projecls tn isc0 eta ou A eee eee 102 9 3 SAVING Projectin ed eke ee dy
24. SWOOA0 to SWO0A7 e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored Stores the stop error status for each station 0 Normal 1 Stop error b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 SW0100 re CPU operation status 06 105 104 103 102 101 100 sworo7 Caen station 1 Swo107 EEES beh COCUT UE Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status each station SWO0AO to SWO0A7 e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored 248 APPENDIX Availability Number Description Master Local station station Stores the continuation error status for each station 0 Normal 1 Continuation error b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 bi b0 sworto 16 15 14 19 12 11 10 98 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 swo111 22 31 30 20 28 27 26 25 24 28 22 21 20 19 10 17 Swot 12 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 swo113 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 swor14 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 7271 7069 58 57 95 5 SW0110 swo115 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 CPU operation status to nO
25. Section 10 2 1 Channel No Select the channel number Set the network number Setting range 1 to 239 Network No Set the total number of stations Setting range 1 to 120 Total Stations Set the station number of the board Setting range Fixed to 0 for a master station 1 to 120 for a local station Station No Mode Select the mode Page 111 Section 10 2 1 Network Configuration Setting Display the Network Configuration Setting screen gt Page 112 Section 10 2 2 Network Operation Setting Display the Network Operation Setting screen 7 Page 116 Section 10 2 3 Event Setting Display the Event Setting screen lt Page 117 Section 10 2 4 Driver Setting Display the Driver Setting screen Page 119 Section 10 2 5 Target Setting Display the Target Setting screen _ gt Page 120 Section 10 2 6 2 Clickthe ed _ button Screen button e Routing Parameters button Displays the CC IE Field Routing Information Setting screen gt Page 121 Section 10 2 7 Check button Checks whether the settings are correct 110 CHAPTER 10 SETTING PARAMETERS 10 2 1 Network type and mode The following explains network types and modes of parameter 1 Network type The following types can be selected Item Description CC IE Field Master Station Use as a master station in the CC Link IE Field Network CC IE Field Local Station Use as a local station
26. Section 16 2 1 e Uninstallation failed 1 gt Page 169 Section 16 2 2 1 6 2 1 Installation failed When the installation is aborted or failed reinstall the utility by the following procedure 1 Check the installation uninstallation precautions Page 87 Section 6 1 2 Restart the personal computer 3 Ifthe utility can be uninstalled uninstall it Page 90 Section 6 3 After the uninstallation restart the personal computer 4 Install the utility again by following the installation procedure When the screen whosemeasurement is not sure is displyed Page 170 Section 16 2 3 L Page 177 Section 16 3 4 5 Ifthe personal computer does not operate normally after the reinstallaion check if the personal computer has any problems e Operating Environment Page 187 Section 16 7 4 e Checking personal computer and operating system Page 187 Section 16 7 5 If any of the above troubleshooting do not solve the error refer to k Page 198 Section 16 8 16 2 2 Uninstallation failed 2 z When the uninstallation is failed uninstall the utility after the reinstallation by the following procedure z T 1 Check the installation uninstallation precautions Page 87 Section 6 1 j 3 2 Insert the CD ROM in the CD ROM drive E 3 Display the Run screen from the WindowsR Start Menu or Quick Access Menu 3 4 Append A and execute Disk1 Setup exe of the CD ROM gt 5 Install the utility again by following the in
27. Show details 2 Allow Change when these notifications appear I trust this program I know where it s from orI ve used it before Y Details User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer uoljounj aiempuey jo aBuey p O xipueddy SUOI JOUN paro1du pue MeN O Xipueddy 261 Appendix 11 2 Methods for preventing warning message Point The user account control UAC function prevents a crash e g prevention of start up of a program which executes unintended operation Before setting this function grasp that the security function offered by UAC will be disabled and fully understand the risk The following two methods are available for preventing a warning message 1 Disabling user account control function The following shows a procedure for disabling the user account control function a Using Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 Internet Internet Explorer sy E mail L Windows Mail d Welcome Center Backup Status and Configuration a Windows Media Player a Small Business Resources pe Windows Fax and Scan g Windows Meeting Space i Windows Photo Gallery 2 Windows Live Messenger Download Y Paint gt All Programs esa Control Panel Control Panel Home 5 ae System and Maintenance TORE eN Get started with Windows Back up your computer Security f e eck for updates eck this computer s security status r am through Windows Fi I ki E i Hardw
28. Sw0116 112 114 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 O SWO0117 swot17 y120 119 118 117 116195 114 113 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status each station SWO0AO to SWO0A e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored Stores if an error frame is received on the transmission path at each station s PORT1 0 A line error has not yet occurred on the transmission path of the each station s PORT1 1 A line error has occurred on the transmission path of the each station s PORT1 When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned ON the stored status is cleared b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 swor2o 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 e 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SW0120 PORT1 error frame ini to reception status bic O SW0127 each station Seales 164 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 swo124 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 74 70 69 68 67 66 65 swo125 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 Sw0126 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 swot27 fr2o t 19 1 19
29. User Accounts and Family Safety Ba System Appearance and F View amount of RAM and processor speed Check the Windows Experience Index PA bOn Allow remote access See the name of this computer Device Manager Clock Language and Region Ey Windows Upd late Ease of Access Turn automatic updating on or off Check for updates View installed updates Power Options Change battery settings Require a password when the computer wakes Change what the power buttons do Change when the computer sleeps Ma Backup and Restore Back up your computer Restore files from backup Windows Anytime Upgrade Get more features with a new edition of Windows 7 22 Administrative Tools Free up disk space Defragment your hard drive Create and format hard disk partitions View event logs Schedule tasks 9Bessay BUIuJeAn sMOpulIM LL xipueddy y To the next page obBessau Bulusem Bunuanaald 104 SPOYISIN ZL xIpuaddy 265 From the previous page y 4 Select Local Security Policy JO E gt comite Sem e scaiy gt AdminsriveToos 6 Se aanroer P Organize y E Open Burn m0 A Favori Name Date modified Type Size EE Desktop 2l Component Services 2009 07 14 13 46 Shortcut 2KB Downloads AF Computer Management 2009 07 14 13 41 Shortcut 2 KB R E M A R KS 3 Recent Places Data Sources ODBC 2009 07 14 13 41 Shortcut 2 KB Event Vi 2009 07 14 13 42 Shi 2KB 1 1 eens ee E When user account c
30. data are correctly set and take corrective action 200 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING D209H Target station No error in D20AH transient data D20BH AS me Staven Ne e Correct the target station number at the request source and retry the operation error in transient data Current master station No error D20CH in transient data e Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and take action e When the own station or target station detected an error identify the cause of the error and take action Transient data transmission D20DH e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation completion wait timeout e When the mode of the master station is Online High Speed Mode change it to Online Normal Mode and retry the operation e Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected properly Header information error in i D20EH i e Correct the header information at the request source and retry the operation transient data D20FH Target station No error in e Check if the command can be requested to all or a group of stations at the request transient data source and retry the operation Target station No error in i D210H e Correct the header information at the request source and retry the operation transient data Own station No undefined D211H e Set the station number in the parameter setting and retry the operation ded
31. f o Work window Necessary Setting No Setting Already Set Set if itis needed No Setting Already Set Routing Parameters Cancel Display contents uo eJIn yuoo Swe UIeN 128 suo eJado oIseg pue uoNeinbyUuoD Uaalos 28 Title bar Display a project name Menu bar Display menu options for executing each function Toolbar Display tool buttons for executing each function Page 96 Section 8 2 2 A main screen used for operations such as parameter setting Work window o Page 98 Section 8 2 3 and monitoring 95 8 2 2 Toolbars A toolbar is a block of on screen buttons for executing frequently used functions included in a menu The toolbars to be displayed and their display positions on the screen can be set by the user 1 Displaying hiding toolbars Select a toolbar to be displayed Operating procedure 1 View gt Toolbar gt toolbar name The selected toolbar is displayed on the screen view Online Diagnostics Window Help 22 CC IE Field Utili ty E EJ bas Network Parameter a Standard Board common gt Project Edit View Online Diagnostics window Help 2 Docking floating toolbars Switch the display format docking floating of a toolbar a Floating a toolbar Display a toolbar floating from the main frame Operating procedure 1 Drag a docked toolbar to the desired position for floating display 2 CC IE Field Utility CC IE Fie
32. magi Communication test has been completed Network No Presence or absence of errors on the communication test No 1 AE A i EA 0 b E AMA lt gt Own Station Target Station Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Communication Test Contents Set the contents of the test to be executed Connected Station Own Display the network number and station number of the connected station Target Station Set the network number and station number Communication Data Set the data length 1 to 900 bytes the number of communications 1 to 100 times and Setting monitoring time 1 to 100 seconds to execute the test 2 Clickthe Execute Test button The communication test is executed according to the set contents Display contents Item Description Display the result of inter network communication test Also in Presence or absence of errors on the communication test displays whether the communication test has been executed normally Communication Test Result y Networks and stations routed from the own station connected station to the target station are displayed in the lt lt Outward gt gt tab and those routed from the target station to the own station connected station are displayed in the lt lt Inward gt gt tab 156 CHAPTER 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13 2 4 Cable test Test the status of the cable connections between the testing station
33. unperformed stations A station that was reconnected to a network after cable disconnection insertion or power off and power on of the system and remains disconnected e Data link unexecuted stationsA disconnected station with the station icon deleted in the network map display area by clicking the Hide Disconnected Station button e is displayed on the icon of a cable where a communication error occurs To check the details of the communication error click the neighboring stations of e is displayed if the network is configured in ring topology although the loopback function is disabled e is displayed if the network is configured in star topology although the loopback function is enabled e is displayed if the network is incorrectly configured in ring topology CC IE Field Diagnostics Monitor Status aT Monitoring Stop Monitor Hide Disconnected Station Legend Select Diagnostics Destination Board Board 1 Network No 1 Change Board Select Station Station No 3 Error Network Status Total Slave Stations Total Slave Stations 3 Current Link 1 Number of Station gt Set In Parameter Connected Scan Time MS Errors Detected Connected St Master 0 Local 1 Branch St No 2 P1 ES HE 0 El Intelligent 2 ra he 146 CHAPTER 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 2 Status of a station selected in Network Status is displaye
34. 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 swore7 120 9 118 17110 115 114 11 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to O Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status each station SWO0AO to SWO0A7 e Stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored Availability Master station Local station APPENDIX Appendix 5 Processing Time The processing time of the CC Link IE Field Network consists of the time components below Sequence scan Link refresh time Link scan time Slave station processing time Transmission delay time 4 Personal computer y station board Link device station Link device External Ae Processing time of slave station 5 Sol device Link scan time Link refresh time eo m S S S S S SS em ee ee ee a e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Link refresh time gt Page 254 Appendix 5 1 e Link scan time lt gt Page 254 Appendix 5 2 e Slave station processing time Manual for the slave station used e Transmission delay time gt Page 255 Appendix 5 3 w Buissed0jg G Xipuaddy 253 Appendix 5 1 Link refresh time The following is a calcu
35. 16 to 16384 start number RWw RWr Equal Assignment Set the start station number of local stations for which link devices are equally assigned Total Points Assigned Start Station Setting range 1 to the end slave station number Set the end station number of local stations for which link devices are equally assigned End Station Setting range Start station number to the end slave station number Set the start number of link devices to be equally assigned Start No Setting range 0 to 1FFC Set the total points of link devices to be equally assigned Setting range 4 to 8192 start number 2 Click the ok __ button Total Points Assigned 115 10 2 3 Network operation setting Set the parameter name and network operation at data link error Display contents W View gt Network Parameter gt CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting screen gt Network Operation Setting Network Operation Setting r Parameter Mame gt Data Link Faulty Station Setting f Turn OFF or O Clear Input Data RAJA Hold Input Data RAY Ene Cancel Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Set the parameter name of the Network Operation Setting Parameter Name Setting range Up to 8 characters Data Link Faulty Station Setting Select whether to hold or clear data input from the slave station where a data link error has occurred 2 Clickthe End
36. 177 9A1J99 J9 JOU SI USaJos ay uo paAejdsip Uone aaljoalJo y 9 Aun pue sayndwoy euos1agy Jo Bunooysajqnol 9 16 3 5 Personal computer operates slowly The following explains the troubleshooting when the following symptoms occurred and operating speed of the personal computer became slow e Response of mouse or keyboard is slow e Operating speed of another application is slow e CPU utilization of personal computer is high e Operation of sound function is unstable When the operating speed of the personal computer becomes slow check the following items Item Corrective action Start the Windows task manager and specify the application with high ls the CPU utilization of other application high CPU utilization in the lt lt Processes gt gt or lt lt Performance gt gt tab e Reduce the execution frequency of the application with high CPU utilization e Adjust the value of link refresh cycle setting E Page 119 Section 10 2 5 e Set the constant link scan Page 114 Section 10 2 2 1 Is the cyclic transmission operation time longer 5 o gt a e Adjust the number of transient transmissions Is the transient transmission operation time se e Reconsider Event Condition of the event function longer i c Page 117 Section 10 2 4 Replace the personal computer if its processing capability is lower for the desired processing 16 4 Troubleshooting for Board and Driver The follo
37. 197 Section 16 7 14 Check the user program Check the operating environment K Page 187 Section 16 7 4 Check the arguments of the communication function A MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual Check the returned values of the communication function Page 199 Section 16 9 2 When error cannot be solved If the troubleshooting above does not help refer to L Page 198 Section 16 8 166 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 1 Error Examples The following tables show examples of the major error under the specific conditions When the corresponding error occurred refer to the troubleshooting of each error 1 Installation of the software package Installation of the software e Page 173 Section 16 2 4 package has failed A mark is displayed next to the icon of the drive on the Device e Page 188 Section 16 7 6 Manager screen Uninstallation of the software The software package is not uninstalled despite the uninstallation e Page 169 Section 16 2 2 package has failed completed message has been displayed 2 Personal computer and utility Personal computer does not start The system error screen has been displayed or shuts down e Page 175 Section 16 3 1 The operating system down or system reset occurred when the Personal computer shuts down system Is in operation The system down occurred when deleting or disabling the driver Page 175 Section 16 3 1 a There is no icon in the start menu of the o
38. 2012 e Windows 8 2 Behavior when the fast startup function is enabled The following explains the behavior of the board when the fast startup function is enabled e The board is not reconnected even after the fast startup e After the fast startup 28141 9213H System sleep error occurs when accessing CC Link IE Field Network board from the CC IE Field utility or an application program which includes MELSEC data link library function 3 Measurement When the fast startup function is enabled on the personal computer the setting is changed by MELSECPowerManager For details of MELSECPowerManager refer to the following section gt Page 271 Appendix 13 270 APPENDIX Appendix 13MELSECPowerManager MELSECPowerManager is a service application which monitors the Windows Power Options settings every 30 seconds to prevent the personal computer from entering the power save mode hibernate sleep or the fast startup function MELSECPowerManager is applicable for the following operating systems e Windows Vista e Windows Server 2008 e Windows Server 2008 R2 e Windows 7 e Windows Server 2012 e Windows 8 When a personal computer is set to enter the power save mode hibernate sleep or the fast startup function is enabled the following message is displayed and the setting is changed by MELSECPowerManager For safety use of MELSEC Interface Board the power options of fe For safety use of MELSEC
39. 84 83 82 81 rosfrorkoslosjoahoshozhorfioolao e er gt J120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 to h stati SWO0A7 each station Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number SI7 MS Ja sI6ay Jeloeds yu y xipueddy are ignored 245 Availability Number Description Master Local station station Stores the cyclic transmission status for each station 0 Cyclic transmission normal station 1 Cyclic transmission faulty station e If multiple stations change from faulty to normal because they are reconnected to the network one by one per link scan the time until the status changes to 0 Cyclic transmission normal station may vary by several seconds e If no response is received for several link scans the station is determined to be a cyclic transmission faulty station b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 SWOOBO t Data link status emer ds O SW00B7 12 20 27 20 25 24 20 22 21 20 10 10 17 o 64342 414050 36 37 905 38 0 e 7 E each station 50 5750565453 62515048 2674 79 72 71 70 6060976665 1150 39 67 08624808261 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e S
40. Base http support microsoft com kb 827218 As of August 2013 173 pa e sul JOU SI JaAUP Y USYM YZI UONe e SUIU UOHe e Su 10 Bunooyseqnol z 9L When the Found New Hardware Wizard screen is not displayed automatically after the board installation update the driver on the Device Manager screen g Computer Management 3 a Fie Action view Window Help e 00925032 lt RA El Computer Management Local A Monitors E nm System Tools 88 Network adapters ga Event Viewer 3 gt Other devices Shared Folders E an Network Controller Local Users and Groups BR Processors Update Driver 2 Performance Logs and A H Sound video ant Disable 2 Device Manager y gs Storage volumes Uninstall lt ll gt 3 System devices Launches the Hardware Update Wizard For the selected device AA Scan for hardware changes Properties Found New Hardware Wizard 4 Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for Network Controller If your hardware came with an installation CD 42 or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do O Install the software automatically Recommended Click Next to continue Found New Hardware Wizard 5 Please choose your search and installation options SS Sy Search for the best driver in these locations 6 Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which
41. CC Link IE Field Network board may not operate properly INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing Q8OBD J71GF11 T2 Q81BD J71GF11 T2 CC Link IE Field Network Interface Board This manual describes CC Link IE Field Network and the system configuration specifications operating procedure functions and troubleshooting of the Interface Board Before using this product please read this manual and the related manuals carefully and develop familiarity with the functions and performance of Q80BD J71GF11 T2 Q81BD J71GF11 T2 CC Link IE Field Network Interface Board to handle the product correctly When applying the program examples introduced in this manual to the actual system ensure the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems Please make sure that the end users read this manual RELATED MANUALS Manual name lt Manual number model code gt MELSEC Q CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual lt SH 080917ENG 13JZ47 gt MELSEC L CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual lt SH 080972ENG 13JZ54 gt MELSEC L CC Link IE Field Network Head Module User s Manual lt SH 080919ENG 13JZ48 gt CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module User s Manual lt SH 080939ENG 13JZ50 gt MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual lt SH 081035ENG 13JV25 gt Description Overview of the CC Link IE Field Network and specifications procedures before operation sys
42. Cable Test button Follow c gt and select Cable Test menu to open the screen Network No 1 Station No 2 y Execute Test Testing cable status between testing station and equipment connected to testing station port Cable Test Result PORT1 PORT2 Test Result Test Result Normal Cable disconnected unconnected Error Factor Error Factor Cable between this PORT and connected equipment is disconnected or cable is not connected to PORT Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Please check if cable is connected to PORT Please check if cable to connected equipment is not disconnected E Operating procedure Operating procedure gt Describes the operating f Set the items on the screen 3 Item Description gt procedure of a function Sabie testConi nte 7 Testing Station Setting Set the network number and station number of the station which executes the cable test 2 Click the Execute Test button The cable test is executed on the testing station MOMION Pelt Al AUIT OD Bulsoubeig Z pL Display contents Display contents Describes the display contents Item Description Cable Test Result Display the cable test result error factor and troubleshooting of each port on the screen Screen button Screen button Describes the buttons in the e SelectAll button Selects all stations displayed in the list screen e Cancel All Selections button Cancels the selection status of all s
43. Diagnostics gt CC IE Field Diagnostics gt button Click the button to perform the communication test If an error occurs take actions according to the error message O When conducting the test on relay stations set the receiving relay station in Communication Destination Setting Setting the sending relay station will cause an error Network No 1 Station No 0 Network No 2 Station Station No 1 No 2 Receiving Sending relay station relay station Station No 0 Own station request source 62 CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS This chapter explains the functions of the CC Link IE Field Network board 5 1 Function List The following table explains the function list of the CC Link IE Field Network board 1 Cyclic transmission rane Communication I O data in bit units is communicated between the own station and by RWw and RWr other stations board and the device of the driver is performed automatically Page 119 Section 10 2 5 This mode is selected for optimizing the performance of cyclic transmission based on the cyclic transmission and transient Page 111 Section 10 2 1 Page 256 Appendix 6 Mode selection for cyclic ie transmission frequency transmission The mode can be selected from Online Normal mode and Online High speed mode Constant link scan setting can be selected to execute the link scan at Link scan mode setting Bact he Page 114
44. Monitoring Time 15 Link Refresh Cycle End Cancel 1 ms Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Select Use driver WDT function to enable the function Driver WDT Monitoring Time Set the driver WDT monitoring time Setting range 1 to 32767 Set the transient timeout monitoring time Transient Timeout MonitoringTime Setting range 1 to 360 Set the link refresh cycle Link Refresh Cycle Setting range 1 to 1000 RECV Function Reception Buffer Set the RECV function reception buffer 1 Set No Setting when RECV Function is selected for the device code in the event setting 2 Clickthe End __ button 119 Bulnes JOAUG S Z OL JOJOWECIC d 110M3N Bumaes COL 10 2 6 Target setting Set logical station numbers to access to multiple CPU system or redundant CPU system using the MELSEC data link library function Display contents W View gt Network Parameter gt CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting screen gt Target Setting Network Parameter CC IE Field Target Setting Board No 1 Logical Station No Multiple PLC Redundant PLC EE IE Clear Check End Cancel Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Set the logical station number Logical Station No Setting range 0 to 239 Set the network number of the access target Network No Setting range 1 to 239 Set the station number of the acces
45. ON the personal computer Turn ON the module CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION b Executing loop tests The executing station master station performs a loop test 1 Select a board to be tested on the Board Channel Mo 121 Diagnostics screen in CC IE Field Utility 2 gt Page 142 Section 13 1 2 Set Mode to Loop Test and click the Start Test button Mode Loop Test Bl Start Test lt Normal completion gt 3 The result is displayed on Test Result field Test Result a If the test completes abnormally check the error cause Loop Test was normaly completed on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen process the error lt Page 144 Section 13 2 lt Abnormal completion gt Test Result Loop Test was abnormaly completed Point O During the loop test data link stops on all stations When a faulty station cannot be displayed on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen The following errors may have occurred e Master station duplication Station number duplication e Slave station type error When the faulty station is a module identify the error causes on the System Monitor screen in GX Works2 When the faulty station is a board identify the error causes on the Board Diagnostics screen Page 142 Section 13 1 s9 doo7 p BUI J9YV SIS L ZY 99 4 60 1 2 Cable test Cable test checks if the Ethernet cables are properly connected Only an Ethern
46. SB 18432 4800H F E p c sBpf alotlstif7tite6i s5i 4is3 i42i4 i4o SB SB SB SB SB SB SB SB SB SB sB SB SB SB SB SB 6 Link special register SW Address 18464 to 18975 4820H to 4A1FH The areas to store the value of SW Bale SOIAOp yUuI7 z xipuaddy S9SS9IPpYy JOWIN yng JO sjieleq Zz XIpuaddy Buffer memory p15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO addresses 18464 4820H SWO 18465 4821H Sw 18975 4A1FH SW1FF 219 Appendix 2 2 Offset size information The areas to store the device start number and number of points for each station number Address Decimal Hexadecimal Name O Reference 19456 to 19695 4C00H to 4CEFH Page 220 1 in this section 19712 to 19951 4D00H to 4DEFH Page 220 2 in this section 19968 to 20207 4E00H to 4EEFH Page 221 3 in this section 20224 to 20463 4FOOH to 4FEFH RWr offset size information Page 221 4 in this section 1 RX offset size information Address 19456 to 19695 4C00H to 4CEFH The areas to store the RX start number and number of points for each station No Buffer memory addresses 19456 4C00H Station No 1 Offset 19457 4C01H Station No 1 Size in units of words 19458 4C02H Station No 2 Offset 19459 4C03H Station No 2 Size in units of words 19694 4CEEH Station No 120 Offset 19695 4CEFH Station No 120 Size in units of words The offset and size buffer memory address for each st
47. Section 10 2 2 1 a constant time interval The cyclic data integrity is assured in units of 32 bits or station based Page 69 Section 5 2 3 Assurance of cyclic data integrity units Page 114 Section 10 2 2 1 Input status setting for data link Select whether the input data from another station where the data Page 71 Section 5 2 4 faulty station link error occurred is cleared or held Page 116 Section 10 2 3 During debugging and other operations cyclic transmission is stopped Data reception from the slave station and data transmission js UOHOUNYA pg Page 72 Section 5 2 5 Cyclic transmission stop and restart from own stations are stopped Also the stopped cyclic a Epes de y Page 119 Section 10 2 5 transmission is restarted Transient transmission is not stopped 2 Transient transmission Communicate with other station s programmable controller by MELSEC data link library function Communication by MELSEC data e Device reading and writing of other station s programmable link library function controller e Remote operation to other station s programmable controller e Data reading and writing of an intelligent device station Page 73 Section 5 3 1 Page 75 Section 5 4 Page 164 CHAPTER 14 Setting the routing parameters beforehand also enables transient Seamless transmission with transmission to stations in different networks Communication can Page 74 Section 5 3 2 different networks also be performed
48. Setting Saar Network Operation Setting Network Operation Setting Event Setting Event Setting APA Parameter setting of f Parameter setting of A channel number 181 4A channel number 182 Jl Channel number 181 Channel number 182 O Creating a new project with data read from the board A new project is created with the data read from the board when data are read from the board before creating a new project For reading data from board Page 101 Section 9 1 peog WO1J 0 SIajoweleg Buipesy BuniimM Z LL 125 11 3 Verifying Parameters of Board and Project This section explains a method for verifying parameters set to the board and parameters of open project Use this function to check if the parameters of the projects are the same or to check the changed parameter locations To verify two projects perform the project verification Display contents W Online gt Board Verify gt Page 108 Section 9 7 The verify result is displayed on the Verify Result screen ox Verify Result Board Verify Parameter Source Project Name Project1 Destination Project Name Board Network Parameter Network aramete Source Data Name verify Result I Mismatch in Number of Boards of CC IE Field Setting There were 1 parts not matched 126 Destination Data Name Unmatch Line CHAPTER 11 OPERATING BOARD ONLINE 11 4 Resetting Board This section explains a method for resett
49. T 3 CPU CPU CPU CPU module R oeg UI Network No 4 Network No 1 El Relay station 4 cid id z moquie mo 15g moauie module CC Link IE Field Network Network No 5 m Relay station 5 CPU module Network No 6 X S A 2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A P A A A A A A E A Relay station 6 CPU module Network No 7 O O E A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 4 Relay station 7 CPU CPU CPU module module module Network No 9 Network No 8 CPU CPU CPU module module module Relay station 8 74 CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS 5 4 SEND RECV Function The SEND RECV function sends receives data to from other station s programmable controller using the MELSEC data link library function gt Page 164 CHAPTER 14 This function supports the SEND RECV instruction of link dedicated instruction Point For CC Link IE Field Network board with a serial number whose first five digits are 15102 or higher install SW1DNC CCIEF B version 1 04E or later When using SW1DNC CCIEF B version 1 03D or earlier one of the following error occurs in the SEND RECV function and the function cannot be used e SEND function Board driver I F error 103 0067H e RESV function Timeout error 2 0002H For an error occurred refer to the following manual LAMELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual O Applicable
50. Tcp Listener Adapter e Net Tcp Port Sharing Se e Netlogon ce 1 Network Access Protecti 01 Network Connections Ch Network List Service e Network Location Awar e Network Store Interface amp Office Source Engine Ch Offline Files ce 1 Parental Controls Status Allows Med Stop Pause Resume Restart All Tasks Refresh Properties The Networ Manages o Identifies th Collects an This service The Offline This service Startup Type Disabled Automatic Disabled Disabled Automatic D Automatic D Manual Manual Automatic Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Manual Manual Manual Manual Automatic Automatic Manual Automatic Manual Log On As Local Service Local System Local System Local System Local System Local System Local System y Local System Local System p Network Servic Local Service Local Service Local Service Local System Network Servic Local System Local Service Network Servic Local Service Local System Local System Local Service 4 mW r 213 J9BeUeI I98MOJOISTIN BUMDIYO g e XIpuaddy J9BRUe NIIMOJOISTIN xXIpuaddy Appendix 14emc AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES Compliance with the EMC Directive which is one of the EU directives has been mandatory for the products sold within EU member states since 1996 as well as compliance with the Low Voltage Directive since 1997 To prove th
51. The maximum station to station distance is 100m However the distance may be shorter depending on the operating environment of the cable For details contact your cable manufacturer e The bend radius of the Ethernet cable is limited For details see the specifications of the Ethernet cable to be used 04 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4 Connecting and disconnecting Ethernet cable e Misalignment of the connecting slot of the personal computer may lead to a slight installation error When the board side connector is covered with the personal computer Ethernet cable can not be connected properly Check the board installation status not to overlap the connector and the personal computer Board side connector E O o X Misaligned Proper alignment The connector is not appeared Personal computer P The connector is not covered and can not connect the cable with the personal computer e When disconnecting the cable from the board do not pull the cable by the cable part Pulling the cable connected to the board may result in malfunction or damage to the board or cable e Depending on the adjacent boards and installing slot position connecting disconnecting the communication cable may be difficult In this case use the following dedicated tool Product name Maker Patch cord removal tool PCRT1 Panduit Corp sa CC Link IE Field Network board e _ Board side connector o Latch
52. This setting is used for receiving data from multiple stations such as data sampling Send source Own station CPU module Target station Driver User application main mdOpen 181 1 amp path uopPun4 AOAY GNAS VS L Channel 1 x Channel 1 SEND aceenon bafer mdReceiveEx path 0 255 Channel 2 Channel 2 a a oe A mdClose path 1 Messages received from other stations are stored to a storage channel of the target station specified in the send source 2 A driver executes the RECV function automatically and received data are stored to reception buffers of each channel number in the driver A maximum of 128 reception data are stored to each reception buffer of each channel number in the driver When received data exceeds 128 the driver discards the received data automatically 3 Using the mdReceiveEx mdReceive function data of the specified channel number are read from the reception buffer in the order they were received 19 When the reception buffer is set an error may occur under the following condition Data are read immediately after the send data completion at the sending station When attempting data read by executing the mdReceive mdReceiveEx function immediately after the send data completion at the sending station No reception data error occurs because data have not yet been stored to the reception buffer of the driver e Retry it after a little while e Retry it after a l
53. and Personalization _ Network and Internet Change the theme Gh E Connect to the Internet Change desktop background View network status and tasks Adjust screen resolution Choose homegroup and sharing options Clock Language and Region Change keyboards or other input methods Hardware and Sound View devices and printers Add a device Ease of Access Connect to a projector Let Windows suggest settings Adjust commonly used mobility settings Optimize visual display Programs Uninstall a program 3 Select Change User Account Control settings Sa 2 ieee T Control Panel Home Action Center obra anu Seca Review your computer s status and resolve issues 8 Change User Account Control settings Troubleshoot common computer problems Network and Internet Restore your computer to an earlier time Hardware and Sound r Windows Firewall Programs Check firewall status Allow a program through Windows Firewall User Accounts and Family i Safety System lt View amount of RAM and processor speed Check the Windows Experience Index Appearance and b d Allow remote access See the name of this computer Device Manager Personalization Clock Language and Region Windows Update Ease of Access Turn automatic updating on or off Checkforupdates View installed updates Power Options Change battery settings Require a password when the computer wakes Change what the power buttons do Change when the computer sleeps B
54. and the devices connected to the ports of the testing station Screen display KO Diagnostics gt CC IE Field Diagnostics gt CC IE Field Diagnostics screen gt Cable Test button Cable Test Cable Test Contents pa Station Setting Network No 1 Station No 2 y Execute Test Testing cable status between testing station and equipment connected to testing station port Cable Test Result PORTI m PORT2 Test Result Test Result Normal Cable disconnected unconnected Error Factor Error Factor Cable between this PORT and connected equipment is disconnected or cable is not connected to PORT Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Please check if cable is connected to PORT Please check if cable to connected equipment is not disconnected Close Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen 159 e1ge9 VCEL YIOMIJON PIa 31 4uIT 90 Buisoubeiq zE Cable Test Contents Testing Station Setting Set the network number and station number of the station which executes the cable test 2 Clickthe Execute Test button The cable test is executed on the testing station Display contents Cable Test Result Display the cable test result error factor and troubleshooting of each port 157 13 2 5 Link start stop Start stop the data link of a specified station Use this function for debugging purposes to stop the station from receiving d
55. button 116 CHAPTER 10 SETTING PARAMETERS 10 2 4 Event setting Set conditions to notify events to a user program Display contents O View gt Network Parameter gt CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting screen gt Event Setting a Network Parameter CC IE Field Event Setting Board No 1 f af Input Format Detection word Device R 0000 Edge Detect RY ow 0020 Level Detect w o 0000 Edge Detect v Equal op ET vr Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Input Format Set the format of the setting value Device Code Set the link device name for the event condition Set the link device number for the event condition Setting range Device No For link devices RX and RY 0 to 3FFF For link devices SB and SW 0 to 01FF For link devices RWw and RWr 0 to 1FFF Detection Method Set the detection method gt Page 118 1 in this section Event Condition Set the event condition 1 gt Page 118 1 in this section Set the word device setting value Setting range For DEC 0 to 65535 For HEX 0000 to FFFF Set the channel number use for dedicated instructions Setting range 1 to 2 Word Device Setting Value Channel No Set the event number Event No Setting range 0 to 15 4 When selecting RECV Function set No Setting for RECV Function Reception Buffer in the driver setting 2 Click the End button 117 Buijes
56. cables and switching hub are connected properly Receive queue full i e Using the COM instruction increase the processing frequency of transient transmission Hardware error e Refer to corrective action for hardware error gt Page 210 1 in this section Parameter error e Write the network parameters again to the programmable controller e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or Parameter check result error representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Hardware error e Refer to corrective action for hardware error _ gt Page 210 1 in this section e Check the error on the PLC Diagnostics screen in GX Works2 and take action CPU module stop error If the error is occurring on the board check it in the event viewer _ gt Page 189 Section 16 7 7 Board driver stop error Programmable controller power e The power is OFF Turn it ON failure Error code D81DH to D825H D826H D827H D902H D903H D905H D906H D909H D90AH D90BH D90CH D90DH DAOOH to DAE7H DAE8H DAF1H DAF2H DAF3H DAF5H to DAF7H Buffer memory start parameter error Flash ROM failure Communication RAM failure Incorrect online test data Communication test retry error Communication monitoring time in communication test timed out Transmission completion wait time in communication test timed out Hea
57. error invalid station 1 Error invalid station b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 swoovofie Jis 141812 fro 98 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 swooD1 2 31 30 2028 27 26 26 24 23 22 21 20 1910 17 Swo0D2 SWOODO OS Swo0D3 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 40 lo eer invalid station swoop4 g0 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 7 70 69 68 67 66 65 O swoop 5909 swoops 96 95 94 93 oz 91 oo 89 e8 87 86 85 84 83 8281 swooD6 1121111 110 108 108 107 106 105 104 103 1021101 100 99 98 97 swooo7 rojuojrejrr moprsitraj113 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored Stores the setting status of the temporary error invalid station 0 Other than temporary error invalid station 1 Temporary error invalid station b15 b14 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 swooeo 6115114 13 2 0 9 8 7 5 5 3 2 1 woo 32 21 20120227 28 25 2a 25 2221 0 10 16 7 SWO0E2 Swo0es 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 swooea co 70 7 77 76 75 74 79 72 71 70 60 7 5 65 SWO0EO wai SwooES o6 os 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 io Tempora Sen invalid modes 11211111110 100 108 107106 105 1041103 102
58. in the CC Link IE Field Network 2 Mode Selectable items for the mode are different depending on the network type a Master station The following modes can be selected Item Description This mode performs cyclic transmission and transient transmission without losing their inherent speed performance This mode is suitable for a system that performs I O control and analog control and transmits large amount of data for management monitoring and diagnostics by transient transmission Use this mode for general applications Online Normal Mode This mode preferentially performs cyclic transmission for high speed communications This mode is Online High Speed suitable for a system to achieve I O control analog control and digital I O at high speed Mode Note that the maximum points assigned to RWw RWr is 256 points per local station In this mode the processing speed of transient transmission is slower than that in Online Normal Mode Offline Select this mode to disconnect the station from the network for stopping data link with other stations For the differences in cyclic transmission between Online Normal Mode and Online High Speed Mode refer to the following section gt Page 256 Appendix 6 b Local stations The following modes can be selected apou pue ad YIOMIEN 1 Z 0L J9 9ueJeg YIOMION uS ZOL Item Description Online Select this mode to connect the station to the network for performing data
59. is OFF Stores if an error frame was received from power on until the present at each station s PORTZ2 OFF An error frame has not been received at any stations ON An error frame has been received at one or more stations If an error frame has been received the status of each station can be checked by the PORT2 error frame detection each station SW0150 to SW0157 O Depending on the timing of the link refresh the PORT2 error frame detection each station SW0150 to SW0157 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores if an error frame was received from power on until the present at the master station s PORT 2 OFF An error frame has not yet been received ON An error frame has been received at least once O Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores the parameter status for each station OFF No parameter errors for any stations ON Parameter error detected at one or more stations If a parameter error occurs the status of each station can be checked by the Parameter error status each station SW0170 to SW0177 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the Parameter error status each O station SW0170 to SW0177 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Reserved stations and stat
60. is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status each station SWO0AO to SWO0A7 Stores if an error frame was received from power on until the present on the transmission path at each station s PORT1 0 A line error is not currently occurred on the transmission path of the each station s PORT1 1 A line error is currently occurred on the transmission path of the each station s PORT1 When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned ON the stored status is cleared b15 b14 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 b1 bO so a0 10 alalim ole e 7 e s a a 211 ES detection each station swo143 alla e gt SW0147 swore a0 70 76 7 76 75 7470 7217170 lea Tes 67 6565 SW0145 eee 86 85 84 83 82 81 SW0146 112 114 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 eee SW0147 EEEE E beahrchalrehalrehivlrs Each number in the table E a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status each station SWO0AO to SWO0A7 250 APPENDIX Availability Number Description Master Local station station Stores if an error frame was received from power on until the present on the transmission path at each station s PO
61. link scan time lower 1 word Stores the link scan time during cyclic transmission Unit us Actual link scan time SW0067 upper 1 word occurrence rate max When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned ON the stored occurrence rate is cleared Stores the occurrence rate current value of received error frames at the own station s PORT1 Unit When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned ON the stored PORT 1 line error SWO0069 occurrence rate present occurrence rate is cleared Stores the occurrence rate maximum value of received error frames at PORT2 line error the own station s PORT2 Unit occurrence rate max When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned ON the stored SWO06A occurrence rate is cleared Stores the occurrence rate current value of received error frames at the own station s PORT2 Unit When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned ON the stored PORT2 line error SWO06B occurrence rate present occurrence rate is cleared SI7 MS Ja sibay Jeloeds yu y xIpueddy Stores the number of the station where loopback is being performed The other loopback station number can be checked by Loopback station number 2 SW0071 obs talen 0 No loopback stations SW0070 1 to 120 Slave station number 1 125 Master station 65535 Station number not set If a station whose station number duplicates is performing loopback this
62. modules DO40H e Refer to corrective action for hardware error gt Page 210 1 in this section D041H e Check the number of connected modules DO80H to DO84H e Refer to corrective action for hardware error lt _ gt Page 210 1 in this section e If the own station or target station was disconnected from the network identify the cause of the disconnection and take action DOAOH Transient data transmission e When the mode of the master station is Online High Speed Mode change it to response wait timeout Online Normal Mode and retry the operation e When the receiving station encountered overloading of transient data reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation e Check if the cables and switching hub are connected properly e Exchange the cables between PORT1 and PORT2 and retry the operation Transient data transmission Paer DOA1H e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation completion wait timeout e Perform hardware and self loopback tests Page 52 Section 4 5 3 Page 53 Section 4 5 4 o e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation Transient data transmission a DOA2H a e Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected processing wait timeout properly e If the own station or target station was disconnected from the network identify the cause of the disconnection and take action DOA3
63. on the hardware installation CD or on the Windows Update Web site with your permission Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software O Yes this time only Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for Network Controller r t your hardware came with an installation CD 42 or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do For Windows Server 2003 R2 the screen shown on the left is displayed Click the Yes button and continue the installation For operating system of Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later the confirmation screen for connection to Windows Update may be displayed Select No not this time and click the button The Found New Hardware Wizard screen is displayed after the board installation Refer to Section 16 2 4 and install the driver When the utility has been started up restart the utility after installing the driver CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 2 4 When the driver is not installed The driver is installed automatically when installing the board on the personal computer after installing the software package For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 R2 the following operation is required Found New Hardware Wizard 1 Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for Network Controller If your hardware came with an installation CD 2 or floppy d
64. range 0 to 3FFO End Specify the end point of relay on the link side Setting range F to 3FFF Specify the number of registers on the link side Setting range Points 4 to 1024 points for Local Station and Intelligent Device Station 4 to 64 points for Remote Device Station RWw RWr Setting Specify the start point of register on the link side Setting range 0 to 1FFC Start Specify the end point of register on the link side Setting range 3 to 1FFF End Reserved Error Invalid Station Set reserved stations and error invalid stations 112 CHAPTER 10 SETTING PARAMETERS Item Description Set the alias Alias Setting range Up to 8 characters Set the comment Comment Setting range Up to 32 characters 2 Click the End button Screen button button Displays the Supplementary Setting screen lt _ gt Page 114 Section 10 2 2 1 e Equal Assignment button Displays the Equal Assignment screen 7 Page 115 Section 10 2 2 2 e Identical Point Assignment button Assigns the same link device points to all local stations Enter the points in the field next to the Identical Point Assignment button Clear button Clears all settings Check button Checks whether the settings are correct Punas uoeinByUOd YIOMION Z Z OL JOJBUeJeY YIOMION Buines ZOL 113 1 Supplementary setting Set the link scan mode loopback function and block data assurance per station
65. received at the execution of mdReceiveEx mdReceive function The following table shows the operation status according to each setting when data are not received at the execution of mdReceiveEx mdReceive function Reception a Event setting of channel Operation status of ulrer O that received data mdReceiveEx mdReceive function RECV function With setting Event setting is not applicable The function ends with an error With event setting No reception data error The function waits for up to the time specified for Transient timeout monitoring time gt Page 119 Section 10 2 5 Without setting When data are received The function ends Without event setting normally When data are not received The function ends with an error Response timer timeout dedicated instruction 81 UOHOUNA AOAY GNAS VS 3 0 Reserved Station Specification and Reserved Station Function Disable Function Reserved station specification allows setting of a station that is not actually connected at present but will be connected to the network in the future must be included in the total number of stations for the network Reserved stations are not detected as error stations even though they are not actually connected When the reserved station function is disabled a slave station specified as a reserved station can be canceled temporarily 1 Reserved station specification A slave station can be specified as a reserved station i
66. register stores the duplicated number Stores the occurrence rate maximum value of received error frames at PORT 1 line error the own station s PORT1 Unit SW0068 l o O 243 Number SWO007 1 SW0074 SW0075 SW0076 SW0077 SWO007A SW007C SW007D SW007E SW007F 244 Loopback station number 2 PORT1 cable disconnection detection count PORT1 receive error detection count PORT1 total number of received data lower 1 word PORT1 total number of received data upper 1 word Event count PORT2 cable disconnection detection count PORT2 receive error detection count PORT2 total number of received data lower 1 word PORT2 total number of received data upper 1 word Availability Master Local station station Description Stores the number of the station where loopback is being performed The other loopback station number can be checked by Loopback station number 1 SW0070 0 No loopback stations 1 to 120 Slave station 125 Master station 65535 Station number not set If a station whose station number duplicates is performing loopback this register stores the duplicated number Stores the cumulative count that was detected for cable disconnections at the PORT 1 When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned ON the stored occurrence rate is cleared Stores the cumulative count that error data was received at the PORT1 T
67. reserved station specification Resetting master station or turning OFF the system The temporary cancellation of reserved station specification is reset and the slave station returns to the status set by the master station s network parameter Disconnecting a station for which reservation has been temporarily cancelled If the master station is reset the master station and local stations will differ in the following e ERR LED status e Data in Reserved station specification SWO0CO to SW00C7 and Reserved station function disable status SW0180 to SW0187 The difference can be corrected by the following procedure 1 Reconnect the disconnected station 2 Temporarily cancel the reservation and then reserve the station again 161 jqeu uoun UOHe s paralasay Z l YIOMIJON PIa 31 4UIT OD Buisoubeiq zE 13 2 8 Enable Disable ignore station errors Set restore temporary error invalid stations This function can be performed when the connected station is a master station Screen display XW Diagnostics gt CC IE Field Diagnostics gt CC IE Field Diagnostics screen o gt ee D anhor button Enable Disable Ignore Station Errors Temporarily ignore station errors Use for network setup and commissioning Stations cannot be set to ignore errors from local station sub master station sub master operation it is not possible if the selected station is a local station sub master station sub master opera
68. station fails as follows e When communication ends normally even though sent data are abnormal e When data cannot be stored in the target station because data is sent to the same station from multiple stations CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS 3 RECV function The RECV function reads data received by the board from the other station using the mdReceive mdReceiveEx function of MELSEC data link library function Send source Own station CPU module Target station User application main mdOpen 181 1 amp path Chamel1 x Channel 1 SEND mdReceiveEx path 0 255 Channel 2 Channel 2 sa mdClose path a Reception buffer of RECV function Reception buffer of RECV function is a function in which a driver executes the RECV function automatically and received data are stored to reception buffers of each channel number in the driver Set the Reception buffer of RECV function in the driver setting of the network parameter gt Page 119 Section 10 2 5 e Without setting When the reception buffer is not set the operation is the same as the RECV function of link dedicated instruction for CPU This setting is used for detecting errors in sent data whose execution type of the SEND function is set to with arrival confirmation at sending side e With setting When the reception buffer is set the operation is the same as the RECV function for MELSECNET H board or CC Link IE Controller Network board
69. stations master station only 10H Parameter not received local stations only 11H Own station number out of range 12H Own station specified as reserved SW0049 Cause of data link stop aa 13H Station number duplication own station SI7 MS Ja sibay Jeloeds yu y xIpueddy 14H Master station duplication 16H Station number not set 18H Parameter error 19H Parameter communication in progress 1AH Station type mismatch 20H CPU module stop error 60H Incorrect ring topology configuration master station only 239 Number SWO004A SW004B SW004C SW0050 SW0051 240 Data link stop request station Own station s CPU status Parameter setting status Data link start status own station Data link stop status own station Availability Description Master Local station station Stores the station number of the station that performed the cyclic transmission stop request for the own station Range 125 master station 1 to 120 local station The cyclic transmission stop request is performed by System link stop SB0003 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores the own station s status 00H No module mounted 01H STOP Normal 02H STOP Stop error occurring 03H STOP Continuation error occurring 04H RUN Normal 05H RUN Continuation error occurring 06H STEP RUN 07H PAUSE OEH Reset in progress OFH Initia
70. status ON Stop error occurred SB0101 master station 1 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores the continuation error status for each station OFF All stations normal ON Station with continuation error found If a station with a continuation error is found the status of each station can be checked by the CPU operation status each station 2 SW0110 to SW0117 CPU operation status SB0110 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the CPU operation status each each station 2 sn gS ejey jeloeds yu xipuaddy station 2 SW0110 to SW0117 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores the continuation error status of the master station s CPU module OFF Normal CPU operation status ON Continuation error occurred SB0111 master station 2 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF 233 Number SB0120 SB0121 SB0130 SB0131 SB0140 234 PORT1 error frame reception status each station PORT1 error frame reception status master station PORT2 error frame reception status each station PORT2 error frame reception status master station PORT1 error frame detection each station Description Stores if an error frame is received at each station s PORT
71. status with monitoring link special relays SB and link special A ee ee os Se Sees he es ee aes ee Se ee se ee 197 16 7 14 Checking communication status with monitoring access target device 197 16 8 Information Required for Inquiries o oooooooon ooo eee ee eee 198 16 9 Error Godelleta a DOU doar ee dios 199 APPENDIX 211 Appendix 1 Precautions for Accessing Redundant CPU System 00 00000 211 Appendix 2 Details of Buffer Memory Addresses 218 Appendix 2 1 ink GeVicetaheat i220 ias a teed a di di des 218 Appendix 2 2 Offset size information o ooooooooooooo ee 220 Appendix 2 3 Own Station infomation 2 2 5 ded eg a a das ded as ee 222 Appendix 2 4 Other station niormaton 3 rwte d wkend ads lo ato all aulas dre ta 223 Appendix 3 Link Special Relay SB List 0 0 0000 oo 224 Appendix 4 Link Special Register SW List 00 nananana cc eee 236 Appendix S Processing TIME itinere ta dd cto a Race aes 253 Appendix 5 1 Link refresh time x Fiend E PU a de a ee 254 Appendix 5 2 SINK SCAM UIC taco e ah LA a he ik eh ak es a ght 254 Appendix 5 3 Transmission delay time 2 0 cc ee 255 Appendix 6 Differences in Cyclic Transmission Modes 0000 cece eee eens 256 Appendix 7 Comparison of CC Link and CC Link IE Field Network 05 257 Appendix 8 Combinations with Existing Software oooooooororoo o 259 Appendix 9 Checking Serial Number and Func
72. t17 st6 115 114 113 Each number in the table represents a station No SI7 MS Ja siBay Jeloeds yu y xIpueddy is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status each station SWOOAO0 to SWO0A7 249 Availability Number Description Master Local station station Stores if an error frame is received on the transmission path at each station s PORT 2 0 A line error has not yet occurred on the transmission path of the each station s PORT2 1 A line error has occurred on the transmission path of the each station s PORT2 When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned ON the stored status is cleared b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO sworso 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 o e 7 Telsa 32 1 SW0130 PORT2 error frame llas to reception status puntos O SW0137 each station swot33 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 sworss 80 79 7877 76 75 74 73 72 71 7060 60 67 seles swo135 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 swo136 112 111 110109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 swo137 j120 119 118 117 116 195 114 11 Each number in the table _ a Station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This
73. the following causes Although the loopback function is disabled the network is configured in ring topology Although the loopback function is enabled the network is configured in star topology The network is incorrectly configured in ring topology Perform the following measures Check if the loopback function setting is correctly configured gt Page 85 Section 5 8 If incorrect correct the network parameter and rewrite it to the board When data link starts over the network the action is successful When the loopback function is disabled perform the following measures Disconnect an Ethernet cable connected to the switching hub and power cycle the hub Repeat this operation until data link starts over the network When data link starts over the network check the network configuration by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics When the loopback function is enabled perform the following measures Configure the network in ring topology without a switching hub Connecting a switching hub will cause a problem such as data link failure 2 gt Page 26 Section 2 2 1 When a master local module is used for the master station check if the master local module supports the loopback function If the master local module does not support the loopback function replace the module with the one which supports the loopback function 151 usalos sonsouBelp Bulkejdsig ZZE WIOMION PIA 31 4UIT OD Buisoubeig zel c
74. the network parameters Online gt Read from Board Page 125 Section 11 2 Write to Board Channel number Set channel numbers of the CC Link IE Field Online gt Page 124 Section 11 1 setting Network board Channel No Setting Check the line status in the network system and i i Loop test i Diagnostics E gt Page 58 Section 4 7 1 parameter setting status of each station Board Diagnostics Check disconnections and incomplete connections Test after Cable test Page 60 Section 4 7 2 wiring of Ethernet cables Diagnostics gt Check whether the communication route of the CC IE Field Diagnostics Page 61 Section 4 7 3 Setting O lt O lt D Communication o ika transient transmission from the own station to a communication target is correct Online gt Device Monitor Page 128 CHAPTER 12 Utility Device monitor Start Device Monitor Utility and monitor devices Monitor CC Link IE Field Debug Network Diagnostics gt Check error locations error causes and event CC IE Field Page 144 Section 13 2 histories diagnostics Diagnostics Reset operation Reset the board pope Page 127 Section 11 4 Reset Operation 91 7 2 Menu List This section explains functions of CC IE Field Utility Project New Create a new project Open Open an existing project Close Close an open project Save Save a project Save As Name and saves a project Compress U
75. the personal computer O e If the error occurs on another personal computer replace the board D gt e If any of the above actions do not solve the error consult your local service 2 a center or representative re 3 LO mr 259 The board more than the maximum S o 0103H number of sheets which was able to be Remove the board which exceeds the maximum number of applicable boards S installed was detected E e Restart the personal computer after installing the software package and 279 An error occurred when Registry 2 check if the error does not occur D 0117H Database wrote out e Increase the system memory and disk capacity 2 lt Own station received the request which 280 i Check the board which is commanding a process and check the program in the D was not processable from another 0118H programmable controller CPU station 286 l i O1EH Failed to allocate the Memory Area Expand the memory in the personal computer 287 The parameter is not set to the board 011Fh Otherwise the parameter set to the Set parameters in the utility and reset the board board is broken 288 LOA E Refer to the corrective action when the driver WDT error occurred 0120H dd AOP Nad COUNTER 1 Page 179 Section 16 4 2 295 Refer to the troubleshooting when the board WDT error occurred The Board WDT error had occurred 0127H E Page 178 Section 16 4 1 Errors occurred in the driver are displayed in the system log of the event viewer
76. the power save mode hibernation sleep e Windows Vista e Windows Server 2008 e Windows Server 2008 R2 e Windows 7 e Windows Server 2012 e Windows 8 2 Behavior when entering the hibernation mode sleep mode The following explains the behavior of the board when the power save mode hibernate sleep is entered on the personal computer e The CC Link IE Field Network board stops its operation and is disconnected from the network e The board is not reconnected even after the personal computer returns from the power save mode hibernate sleep e After the personal computer returns from the power save mode hibernate sleep 28141 9213H System sleep error occurs when accessing CC Link IE Field Network board from the CC IE Field utility or an application program which includes MELSEC data link library function 3 Corrective action When the personal computer is set to enter the power save mode hibernate sleep the setting is changed by MELSECPowerManager For details of MELSECPowerManager refer to the following section gt Page 271 Appendix 13 dnes 1584 JO PON SALS JAMO S Ja8 UY Je NdwOdD Buos 1a y U yM Jomeyag Z xipuaeddy d js ajeulaqiy spow anes Jamod y sajua Jaeduloo jeuoss d ay u ym JolNeyag zz xipuaddy 269 Appendix 12 3 Behavior when fast startup function is enabled 1 Target operating system The following operating systems have the fast startup function e Windows Server
77. with CC Link IE Controller Network and Page 121 Section 10 2 7 MELSECNET H 63 3 RAS function Only the stations where an error has occurred including slave stations are disconnected from the network and the data link is Slave station disconnection continued only with the stations operating normally In a line topology system stations after the station where the error occurred are disconnected When a station disconnected from a network due to a data link error Automatic return recovers from the error the station is automatically reconnected to the network and restarts data link This function disconnects only faulty stations and continues data link with only normal stations Loopback function Page 85 Section 5 8 It also continues data link with normal stations connected after the faulty station which is disconnected in a line topology 4 Diagnostic function The status of the CC Link IE Field Network can be checked by CC IE CC Link IE Field Network e l i l Apanostics Field Utility The faulty area cause of the fault and its corrective Page 144 Section 13 2 action and event history can be checked Check the hardware of the bus I F function of the CC Link IE Field Bus I F test Page 51 Section 4 5 1 Network board aa Memory test Check the memory of the CC Link IE Field Network board Page 52 Section 4 5 2 oar diagnostics Hardware test Check the internal hardware of the CC Link IE Field Network boa
78. without using a switching hub The connection between the board and modules using an Ethernet cable makes a ring Ring topology topology Data link continues with the stations that are operating normally Point Only the slave station in which an error has occurred is disconnected from the network Data link continues with the stations that are operating normally In a line topology all stations connected after the faulty station are disconnected In ring topology data link continues with the stations that are operating normally Line topology tine topotogy Stations after the faulty station Master station Station No 0 are disconnected IAS i 1 EE Er E A Error I s WWE Jf i la i yA ER i eee Hl sn 4 DOT Ring topology The system will continue data link among normal stations only Master station Station No 0 AO gt gt gt E A gt 2 p gt ae WaISAS YIOMION 3JBUIS Z Z 2 28 3 Precautions a Connecting devices to the same network To a switching hub on CC Link IE Field Network do not connect an Ethernet device e g personal computer on a network other than CC Link IE Field Network Doing so will cause timeout in the master station resulting in disconnection among all stations b Configuration in which data link cannot be performed incorrect ring topology Point Do not wire devices as shown below Doing so will cause an erro
79. your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Refer to corrective action for hardware error lt _ gt Page 210 1 in this section e The flash ROM may be faulty e Refer to corrective action for hardware error lt _ gt Page 210 1 in this section e Refer to corrective action for hardware error gt Page 210 1 in this section 209 Error code ono Error Corrective action DAF8 to e The flash ROM may be failed Perform hardware and self loopback tests Flash ROM failure DAF9H e Refer to corrective action for hardware error gt Page 210 1 in this section 1 Corrective action for hardware error e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise e Check the wire and cable lengths and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise Page 43 CHAPTER 4 e Hardware may be faulty e Test the board alone gt Page 191 Section 16 7 10 1 210 APPENDIX APPENDIX Appendix 1 Precautions for Accessing Redundant CPU System This section explains precautions for accessing a redundant CPU system via CC Link IE Controller Network or MELSECNET H network using the CC Link IE Field Network board 1 Redundant CPU specification When the system control system standby system system A system B of the Redundant CPU is specified to access the Redundant CPU the Logical station No set on the Target setting screen of the CC I
80. 0 00 Master Stati lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link uy lt Clear Event History History Acquisition Setting Information Create csv Fe Refresh Selected Station Communication Status Monitor Q81BD J716 A o Monitor Status q 153i Monitoring Stop Monitor Hide Disconnected Station Legend St No 2 Module Error Display error occurrence Error details Selected station No 0 Detailed Information Total Number of Received Data on PORT1 side 4450409 Total Number of Received Data on PORT2 side 0 Own Station Connecting Status Normal Communicating on PORT1 side Cable Disconnected on PORT2 side Reason for Transmission Interruption None Reason for Data Link Stop Station Type Mismatch Error Factor The station type of the host station does not match the one set in the master station Troubleshooting Correct the station type in the master station parameter to match the station type of the host station and then write parameters to the PLC CPU and reset the master station CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1 System Configuration Using CC Link IE Field Network Board A system configuration when using the CC Link IE Field Network board which is installed to a personal computer is shown below Connect Connect Ethernet CC Link IE Field cable Network system Per
81. 000 to SB0003 this is enabled when only one of them is turned ON Clears the link special registers for the communication error SW0068 to be SWOO6B SW0074 to SW0077 SWO007C to SWO007F SW0120 to SW0127 Clear communication SB0006 Sorco SW0130 to SW0137 SW0140 to SW0147 and SW0150 to SW0157 OFF No clear direction ON Clear direction This clears the Event history status SB007A and Event count SW007A SB0009 Event count clear OFF No clear direction ON Clear direction Errors are not counted while this is ON sn gS ejey jeloeds yu xipuaddy Stations specified in Reserved station function disable temporary error invalid station setting SW0010 to SW0017 are set as temporary error invalid Temporary error invalid SB0010 stations OFF No request ON Request issued request Stations specified in Reserved station function disable temporary error invalid station setting SW0010 to SW0017 are canceled from temporary error invalid Temporary error invalid SB0011 stations OFF No request ON Request issued setting cancel request 225 Number SB0012 SB0013 SB0030 SB0031 SB0040 SB0043 SB0044 SB0045 SB0047 226 Reserved station function disable request Reserved station specification enable request RECV execution request flag 1 RECV execution request flag 2 Network type own station Mode own station Station setting own station 1
82. 1 OFF An error frame has not yet been received at any stations ON An error frame has been received at one or more stations If an error frame has been received the status of each station can be checked by the PORT1 error frame reception status each station SW0120 to SW0127 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the PORT1 error frame reception status each station SW0120 to SW0127 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores if an error frame is received at the master station s PORT 1 OFF An error frame has not yet been received ON An error frame has been received Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores if an error frame is received at each station s PORT2 OFF An error frame has not yet been received at any stations ON An error frame has been received at one or more stations If an error frame has been received the status of each station can be checked by the PORT2 error frame reception status each station SW0130 to SW0137 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the PORT2 error frame reception status each station SW0130 to SW0137 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores if an error frame is received at the master station s PORT2 O
83. 1 Section 4 7 3 result normal Is the MD function argument correct Is the target station s network number correct Is the target station number correct Is the board hardware operating normally Corrective action If the D LINK LED is OFF perform the troubleshooting Page 194 Section 16 7 11 2 In the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics identify the cause of the error and perform the corrective action Page 144 Section 13 2 Change the duplicated station number In the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics identify the cause of the error and perform the corrective action Page 144 Section 13 2 Check the MD function argument Perform the board test Page 191 Section 16 7 10 1 If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to L Page 198 Section 16 8 184 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 7 Checking method The following show the checking methods of the board 1 Checking with eyesight Check the appearance of the device and connection status a Checking the installation and wiring Check if the installation and wiring are performed within the range of the specification e Checking installation environment K Page 186 Section 16 7 1 e Check the board installation L Page 186 Section 16 7 2 e Checking cables and wiring L Page 186 Section 16 7 3 b Checking the board appearance The board status and network status can be checked by MODE LED or switch setting e Checking
84. 1 110 10 108 107 106 108 104 103 1021101 100 ee 98 97 swoo17 j12o 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 Each number in the table represents station No Conditions e Some stations cannot be specified as reserved station function disable or temporary error invalid station setting cancel 7 Page 161 Section 13 2 7 Page 162 Section 13 2 8 e Stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored Specifies the number of resends for the REMFR REMTO instruction 0 0 times default Outside the above Number of times that is set Number of resends SWO001A x REMFR REMTO a Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Specifies the response wait time for the REMFR REMTO instruction 0 10 seconds default o Outside the above Number of seconds that is set Response wait timer SW001B REMFR REMTO Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores the processing results of the link dedicated instruction that used the Send receive instruction own station s channel 1 1 processing result 0 Normal completion 1 or higher Abnormal completion lt 7 Page 199 Section 16 9 SW0030 Stores the processing results of the link dedicated instruction that used the Send receive instruction own station s channel 2 2 processing result 0 Normal completion 1 or higher Abnormal completion
85. 1011100 99 98 97 O swooe7 anon seting swooe7 y12o m9 118 117116 195 114 113 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status each station SWO0AO to SWO0A7 e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number SI7 MS Ja sI6ay Jeloeds yu y xipueddy are ignored 247 Availability Number Description Master Local station station Stores the RUN status of each station 0 RUN STEP RUN 1 STOP PAUSE stop error b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO swooro 10 15 14 18 12 10 10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SooF SWOOF2 swoor3 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 swoor a0 78 76 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 60 68 67 6568 SWOOFO SwooF5 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 AN ibe RUN status each E 200 99 98 97 O swoor7 ation swoor7 11120 bo 118 h171110h115 114111 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status each station
86. 16 9 gt station function enable When Reserved station specification enable request SB0013 is turned OFF the stored error definition is cleared SW0058 O stations setting Range 1 to 120 241 Availability Number Description Master Local station station Stores the number of total slave stations that are actually connected by Number of total slave a SW0059 data link in the CC Link IE Field Network stations current value l Range 1 to 120 0 when own station is disconnected O Stores the maximum station number of the stations where the baton pass is performed Range 1 to 120 0 when own station is disconnected Maximum baton pass oe station Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores the maximum station number of the station where the cyclic transmission is performed Maximum cyclic Range 1 to 120 0 when own station is disconnected SW005B KSP transmission station Conditions e This is enabled when the Data link status own station SB0049 is OFF Stores the maximum value of the link scan time during cyclic transmission Unit ms SWO0060 Maximum link scan time Conditions O e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores the minimum value of the link scan time during cyclic transmission Unit ms SW0061 Minimum link scan time Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status o
87. 1GF11 T2 unit mm 278 APPENDIX Appendix 15 2 Q81BD J71GF11 T2 1 Q81BD J71GF11 T2 Standard size unit mm Z1 LLADLLP GEL80 Z S xipuaddy SUOISUBUIG eulajx3 G xipuaddy F i a az org unit mm 279 INDEX 0to9 Loopback function oo 85 114 C Low profile bracket 0 aaa 20 32 bit data assurance a an anaana naana 69 M A Master Stati0N o o o ooooooooooo 111 Automatic return o o o ooooooooooooo o 64 MD TUNCUONS 42 suda tora debate 164 Mode via Ad tes 111 256 B MODE LED 10 sip Tod il DEE 193 Block Data Assurance per Station 69 N Board Diagnostics o o o o 142 A B ffe memo 3 rasante 40 218 Network configuration o o o 145 Network type 2 ee oo 110 C Nolisetilteros diia as done sed o ada ds 217 A Number of connectable stations 39 CC IE Field Diagnostics 144 CG JE Field Ulloa o os 91 p CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics 144 AA CHANDE ea tieta agan ad pco 90 124 Patch cord removal tool 00008 55 Channel use for dedicated instruction 76 PG IDS A lsat ar ke dott st Mel aed Wg ore a rede 34 Cyclic transmission o oooooooooooo 63 PCI Expres DUS l iw le ede taa 34 Product information o o o o 142 D Product version 2 0 0 ce
88. 2 User program cannot be accessed to CPU module other than QCPU 181 16 5 3 Communication cannot be performed occasionally when executing user program 181 10 54 Stationis disconnecled idos 181 16 5 5 Communication is unstable uta be a ida dd 182 Troubleshooting for Device ACCESS oooooooooooorrrnr eee ae 183 16 6 1 Cyclic transmission cannot be performed o o ooo oooooo eee 183 16 6 2 Transient transmission cannot be performed 0 00 cece eee ee 184 Checking A ode te a Sey Sede O be E a a 185 16 7 1 Checking installation environMment o oooooooonrooon eee ee es 186 16 7 2 Check the board installation Pe dae a Poe eat eh eek a 186 16 7 3 Checking cables and Wiring 0 0 0 0 ccc cet eee 186 16 7 4 Checking operation environment 00000 tenet ees 187 16 7 5 Checking personal computer and operating system 0 00 0 cece ee 187 16 7 6 Checking on Device Manager screen 0 00 ccc tenes 188 13 14 16 7 7 Checking operations with event Viewer 0 0 000000 c cee eee eee 189 16 7 8 Checking channel MUMDers omic dies 191 16 7 9 Checking operations with board diagnostics oooooooooornroronmoooo o 191 16 7 10 Checking operations with tests 2 0 0 0 tent eens 191 16 7711 Checka LED Status uretra EA eae tone 192 16 7 12 Checking network status with CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics 196 16 7 13 Checking network
89. 255H D256H D257H D258H D259H D25AH D25BH D25CH D25DH D25EH D25FH D260H D261H D262H 204 Response timer timeout dedicated instruction Unsupported request received dedicated instruction Target station No error dedicated instruction Execution abnormal end type error dedicated instruction Request type error REQ Specified current control station not exist dedicated instruction Mode error during dedicated instruction execution Channel in use dedicated instruction Channel in use dedicated instruction Dedicated instruction error Incorrect transient data Dedicated instruction error Station type error REMFR REMTO executing station Station type error REMTO executing station Station type error CCPASET executing station Number of total slave stations setting error CCPASET Corrective action The dedicated instruction did not end within the transient timeout monitoring time Send data from other station may be received or the specified target station for executing the dedicated instruction may be failed e When executing the RECV instruction check if a message is sent from another station e Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and take action e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Change t
90. 268H D269H D26AH D26BH D26CH D26DH D280H D281H D282H D283H Station No range error CCPASET Duplicate station No CCPASET Number of total slave stations error CCPASET Station type error CCPASET Device range assignment error CCPASET Target station type error Target station No error Network No error CCPASET executing station Station No error CCPASET executing station Mode error CCPASET executing station Transient data request error Transient reception failed Receive queue full Transient transmission failed CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Corrective action e Correct the constant link scan time in the control data and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Change the station number in the setting data to any of 1 to 120 and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Correct the station number in the setting data and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Correct the number of total slave stations in the setting data and retry the operation e If this error persists ple
91. 28H D780H D781H D782H D783H to D784H D785H D786H D800H to D805H D806H D807H D80AH to D8OFH D812H to D813H D814H to D819H D81AH D81BH 208 Corrective action Link start stop retry error to another station Link start stop retry error to own ee Seton e Retry the operation after stop or restart of cyclic transmission is completed Link start stop retry error to entire system Link start stop station error e Check the setting and then stop or start cyclic transmissions Station type error station e A local station cannot start or stop data link of all or multiple stations Execute data executing data link start stop to link start stop of all or multiple stations from the master station the entire system Transient data request error e Correct the request command at the request source and retry the operation e Link start was instructed from a station different from the station that instructed the link stop The station instructing a link start must be the same as the station that instructed the link stop Data link start stop instructing e The method of the link start data link start instruction in CC Link IE Field Network station error diagnostics or by using the link special relay SB or link special register SW in the program is different from that of the link stop Instruct the link start by the same method as used for the link stop instruction e Link start has failed in th
92. 3 Line topology 12000m when connected to 1 master station and 120 slave Connection cable Maximum station to station distance stations Overall cable distance Star topology Depends on the system configuration Ring topology 12100m when connected to 1 master station and 120 slave stations Number of cascade connections Up to 20 Line topology star topology coexistence of both line topology and star topology is possible ring topology Number of connectable Master station 1 station up to 120 slave stations can be connected to master station Network topology suoneooads aoueuoJad ZE stations per network Local station 120 stations Maximum number of networks 239 Communication method Token passing method 4 This indicates the point which can be assigned for one station by master station For local station the data from other station can be received other than the point written in the table 2 For Online High speed mode 256 points and 512 bytes L Page 111 Section 10 2 1 Specification Item Q80BD J71GF11 T2 Q81BD J71GF11 T2 Number of boards that can be installed Up to 4 PCI bus slot or PCI X slot PCI Express X1 X4 X8 X16 slot Installation slot Half size Standard low profile half size Internal current consumption 1 10A 5VDC 1 68A 3 3VDC Weight 0 11k Standard size 0 08kg i Low profile size 0 07kg 39 3 3 List of Buffer Memory Addresses The buffer memory is used f
93. 56 points 512 bytes Maximum number of transients per link scan 4 slave stations x 1 5 4 2 Differences in link scan time The link scan times in normal mode and high speed mode are shown below when assigning 128 points to RX RY per station 64 points to RWw RWr per station and the number of connected stations is increased Link scan time ms Total Online High speed mode Total number of points Network Operation Setting for link devices Network Operation Setting Turn OFF or 0 Clear Input i bytes Hold input Data RX RY Data RX RY 4 Normal mode number of Online Normal mode stations High speed mode _ Input data OFF A High speed mode _ Input data held Link scan time ms 0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 Total number of stations 256 APPENDIX Appendix 7 Comparison of CC Link and CC Link IE Field Network This section explains the differences in the specifications between CC Link Ver 2 board and CC Link IE Field Network board 1 Performance specifications comparison a Transmission and interface specifications Specifications em CC Link IE Field Network board 1 Maximum link points per network 8192 points 16384 points R 8192 points 16384 points Master 2048 points i 8192 points A station 8192 points 16384 points number of send points per A Rww 128 points Online Normal mode 1024 points station a Online High speed mode 256 points station
94. 7776 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 60 65 SW0170 swo175 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 25 4 23 82 61 to Parameter error status SW0176 112 1111110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 O swoi7r Caen stalon swot77 gt fraofitofisehr 7p els ashi ra ita Each number in the table represents a station No SI7 MS Ja siBay Jeloeds yu y xipueddy is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status each station SWO0AO to SWO0A7 e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored 201 Number SW0180 fs Reserved station function disable status SW0187 252 Description Stores the station that is currently in reserved station function disable status 0 No reserved station function disable is specified 1 Reserved station function disable in progress b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO sworso 16 15 14 13 12 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 swo181 32 31 30 26 28 27 26 25 26 20 22 ar 20 10 18 17 SW0182 swot83 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 swotsa so 701 78 77 76 75 74 73 7271 70 40 63 67 66 6s swotes 36 as o4 o8 02 o1 fso 3066 7 6 65465 82 1 swot86 112
95. A Module No 0 Disabled since a CPU module uses two slots Module No 1 Module to the right of a to CPU module Module No 11 Rightmost module on 1 2 slot base unit Q312B e For No of module for which system switching request is issued from the network module in another system refer to SD1690 e Any of the following bits turns ON corresponding to the No of the module for which system switching request is issued from the network module in another system e Turned OFF by the system after the error of the relevant module is resolved by the user Each bit SD1690 o o 1 onlo 4 0N A Module No 0 Disabled since a CPU module uses two slots Module No 1 Module to the right of a to CPU module Module No 11 Rightmost module on 12 slot base unit Q312B e For No of module for which system switching request is issued from the network module in own system refer to SD1590 217 wa s s dD JuUepunpay Buissag9y 104 suonnesalgd xipuaddy Appendix 2 Details of Buffer Memory Addresses This section describes the buffer memory of the CC Link IE Field Network board Address Decimal Hexadecimal Name O Reference 0 to 18975 0000H to 4A1FH Page 218 Appendix 2 1 19456 to 20463 4C00H to 4FEFH Page 220 Appendix 2 2 20512 to 20536 5020H to 5038H Page 222 Appendix 2 3 20544 to 24383 5040H to 5F3FH Page 223 Appendix 2 4 Ap pend IX 2 1 Link device area The areas to store the values of lin
96. CPU module OFF Normal ON Reset status driver stop by H W error Stores the status of the received parameter own parameter status during master station OFF Parameter normal ON Parameter error Turns ON when a cyclic transmission start request by Link start own station SB0000 is accepted OFF Not accepted SB0000 is OFF ON Start accepted SB0000 is ON Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Turns ON when the Link start request accept status own station SB0050 turns ON and cyclic transmission start is completed OFF Start not completed SB0000 is OFF ON Start completed SB0000 is ON Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Turns ON when a cyclic transmission stop request by Link stop own station SB0001 is accepted OFF Not accepted SB0001 is OFF ON Stop accepted SBO001 is ON Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Turns ON when the Link stop request accept status own station SB0052 turns ON and cyclic transmission stop is completed OFF Stop not completed SB0001 is OFF ON Stop completed SB0001 is ON Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF APPENDIX Availability Local Master station station 22 sn gS ejey jeloeds yu xipuaddy Availability
97. D L Z 129 12 2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations of Device Monitor Utility This section explains the screen configuration and basic operations of Device Monitor Utility 12 2 1 Start and completion The following explains the operating method to start end the utility 1 Start Start Device Monitor Utility a Start from CC IE Field Utility Operating procedure 1 Z Online gt Device Monitor Utility b Start from the Windows start Operating procedure 1 Z Start of Windows gt MELSEC gt Device Monitor Utility 1 Start screen All apps or Start All Programs 2 Completion End Device Monitor Utility Operating procedure 1 Menu gt Exit 130 CHAPTER 12 MONITORING 12 2 2 Screen configuration and basic operations The following explains the screen configuration of Device Monitor Utility Screen display Title bar RQUE AA Menu bar p Menu Setting Device Write Data Format Option Help 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 oe 1 0 0 0 Device information 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 181 CC IE Field Data Format The Channel Information in the Current Display Screen j q Network status Network No 0 Station No 255 NES Display method Vertical indication Display contents Item Description Title bar Display a project name Menu bar Display menu options for executing eac
98. DEC decimal 32 bits Wwa esso HEX hexadecimal 32 bits Mwboo0 ooo0s OCT octal 32 bits wwoo00 00000200410 BIN binary 32 bits Ww 0000 0000000000000001 0000000100001000 a Numeral system Select from decimal hexadecimal octal or binary Monitored current values are displayed in a selected numeral system b Bit Select from 16 bits or 32 bits Monitored current values are displayed in a selected bit unit yewo ejdsig Bulyoyms ZZL 139 2 Display format of bit devices The following are display formats that can be selected for bit devices Display format Example xoa 0 xomo 0 xooz0 0 ooo 0 xoi o xoo21 o0 De pevce EDE BA98 7654 3210 decimal 0000 0000 0001 0000 1000 264 ice Horizontal Indication F 0 Device FEDC BA98 7654 3210 hexadecimal 0000 0000 0001 0000 1000 0108 0 Vertical Indication x oo Horizontal Indication F 0 Horizontal Indication 0 F DE 0123 ABE TOA CDE decimal 0000 0001 00001000 0000 264 Horizontal Indication 0 F 0123 4567 B9AB COEF hexadecimal gt 000 0001 0000 1000 0000 0108 a Display order Select from vertical indication horizontal indication F 0 or horizontal indication 0 F Devices are displayed in a selected display order b Numeral system Select from decimal or hexadecimal Bit devices with 16 point unit are displayed in a selected numeral system for horizontal indication 140 CHAPTER 12 MONITORING
99. Data link status 0023 2011 01 07 14 56 11 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 159 EEES button Displays the History Acquisition Setting screen Select events to be acquired History Acquisition Setting Event History Acquisition Setting Own Station Event O ol CL Other Stations Event u Reception of temporary error invalid station SetjGancel instruction Reception of reserved station temporary cancel Seti Valid Set instruction Reception of station Wo Setting qadaa af Vv Iv E m El Mm a BE o E m E E button Clears the network event history exists in the board PESA button Saves the network event history in CSV file format O The board automatically saves event history data on the flash ROM O Auto save may fail if it operates after the board is reset or powered off and later on until initial processing is completed If failed the event Invalid event history data is displayed in Event history contents O An event generated one second before the board is reset or powered off is not saved to event history 160 CHAPTER 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13 2 Reserved station function enable Cancel slave stations temporarily and reserve the slave station again This function cannot be performed when the connected station is a local station Screen display XW Diagnostics gt CC IE Field Diagnostics 2 gt CC IE Field Diagnost
100. Display of network configuration Network configuration is displayed according to the connection status Network configuration Star topology Line topology Star and line mixed Ring topology Actual system configuration Master station Station No 0 Switching hub Intelligent device Intelligent device Intelligent device station Station No 3 station Station No 4 station Station No 5 Master station Local station Intelligent device Station No 0 Station No 1 station Station No 2 Master station Station No 0 Fo Intelligent device BPE Intelligent device Connection q station Station No 3 W station Station No 4 to PORT2 Local station Er Intelligent device Station No 1 H AA station Station No 2 Master station Local station lle y Intelligent device Station No 0 Station No 1 F station Station No 2 Network configuration screen display Connected Station Master 0 Divergence 1 1 _ O Intelli 3 Intelli 4 Intell 5 Connected Station Local 1 Intelli 2 Connected Station Master 0 Divergence P1 P2 Inteli 3 Intelli 4 Locat1 Intell 2 Connected Station Master 0 Local 1 Intelli 2 E iE However in the following cases network configuration displayed in the network configuration screen differs from the actual configuration Network configur
101. E Field Utility is used for access For the Logical station No setting refer to the following section K gt Page 120 Section 10 2 6 4 Network Parameter CC IE Field Target Setting Board No 1 Logical Station No Multiple PLO Redundant PLC 1 No Specification Control System T wals s NdO JUepunpay Buissesoy JO suonnesalg xipuaddy 211 2 Operation at occurrence of system switching When system switching occurs during access to the Redundant CPU access to the Redundant CPU set for the Logical station No is continued Example When the following Logical station No 66 was specified for access Logical station No 66 Network No 1 Station No 1 Multiple PLC Not specified Redundant PLC Control system Before system switching After system switching 212 Station No 4 CC Link IE Field Network module MELSECNET H module Station No 5 CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H Network No 2 Network No 1 Control system a TM Standby system Station No 3 Tracking cable Station No 1 Station No 2 Station No 4 CC Link IE Field Network module MELSECNET H module Station No 5 MELSECNET H CC Link IE Field Network Network No 1 Network No 2 Standby system Control system Station No 3 Tracking cable Station No 1 Station No 2 APPENDIX
102. Errors related to the CC Link IE Field Network board are displayed as Mccief in the source field of the event viewer The following explains error messages and their corrective actions Point For multiple errors check the occurrence order occurrence time on the event viewer screen and perform corrective actions from the first error that occurred Corrective action e Reinstall the software package e Check the board installation condition gt Page 186 Section 16 7 2 Because the error had occurred in the e If the board operates normally on another personal computer the personal 189 Corrective action 296 e Restart the personal computer 0128H Board error was detected by the P P oe di is e Refer to the troubleshooting when the Hardware error occurred ardware self diagnosis R E lt Page 178 Section 16 4 1 0130H Entering sleep mode or hibernation mode or fast startup is detected 305 The board is not operated normally Change the power option not to entering the sleep mode hibernation mode or 0131H because the sleep mode hibernation enabling fast startup and restart the personal computer mode and fast startup is not supported by the board 539 021BH 540 021CH e Restart the personal computer 541 Board error was detected by the 021DH eee edi a e Refer to the troubleshooting when the Hardware error occurred ardware self diagnosis lt Page 178 Sectio
103. FF An error frame has not yet been received ON An error frame has been received Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores if an error frame was received from power on until the present at each station s PORT1 OFF An error frame has not been received at any stations ON An error frame has been received at one or more stations If an error frame has been received the status of each station can be checked by the PORT1 error frame detection each station SW0140 to SW0147 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the PORT1 error frame detection each station SW0140 to SW0147 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Availability Master Local station station i al i al i Number PORT1 error frame SB0141 detection master station PORT2 error frame SB0150 detection each station PORT2 error frame SB0151 detection master station Parameter error status SB0170 each station Reserved station SB0180 function disable status APPENDIX Availability Description Stores if an error frame was received from power on until the present at the master station s PORT 1 OFF An error frame has not yet been received ON An error frame has been received at least once O Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047
104. H Transient data transmission e Correct the target station number of the transient data and retry the operation error e If the target station of the transient data resides in another network check if the routing parameters for respective stations are correctly set and take corrective action DOA4H to DOAGH Transient transmission failed e Check if the cables and switching hub are connected properly e Exchange the cables between PORT1 and PORT2 and retry the operation e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation e Perform hardware and self loopback tests _ gt Page 52 Section 4 5 3 Page 53 Section 4 5 4 DOA7H Transient reception failed 199 SI SPO9 10113 6 9L e The error occurs in the following process Wait for a while and retry the operation DOCOH Reserved station specification DOC1H Disabling the reserved station DOCOKH to DOC2H Data link stop instruction DODOH Process error DOC3hH Data link start instruction DOC4H Temporary error invalid station setting DOC5H Cancellation of temporary error invalid station setting DOC6H Change of other station number setting DODOH Other station number setting In Network Configuration Setting of the master station change the station type to DOEOH Station type mismatch j i 9 J yP that of the own station e In Network Configuration Setting of the master station cancel the reserved DOE 1H Own station specif
105. Interface Board the power options of h y Windows were changed as follows LP Windows were changed as follows Invalidating the sleep settings Changing the settings of power button action in shutdown Invalidating the fast startup settings Invalidating the sleep settings Changing the settings of power button action in shutdown Appendix 13 1 installing MELSECPowerManager MELSECPowerManager is installed automatically when the software package is installed to a personal computer The operation starts after the personal computer is restarted Appendix 13 2 uninstalling MELSECPowerManager J9BRUe NJI98MOJOISTIN XIpuaddy MELSECPowerManager is uninstalled automatically when the software package is uninstalled However it is not uninstalled when another software package of MELSEC interface board is installed to the personal J9aBeue y Ia8mogO3IST3N Burjeisuy Le xipueddy computer Uninstall all software packages for MELSEC interface board installed on the personal computer to uninstall MELSECPowerManager 2 1 Appendix 13 3 checking MELSECPowerManager The following explains how to check the installation and operating status of MELSECPowerManager The following is a setting example when using Windows 7 gt ES 1 Open Control Panel System and Security Adjust your computer s settings View by Category Y System and Security User Accounts and Family Safety Review your computer s sta
106. Is the connected other station normal Check if the other station s power is turned ON 2 a a 3 Is the board hardware operating normally Perform the board test 2 gt Page 191 Section 16 7 10 1 2 og n a a n 195 16 7 12 Checking network status with CC Link IE Field Network 196 diagnostics Check the network condition on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen _ gt Page 145 Section 13 2 2 Check Are all installed boards displayed on the Select Diagnostics Destination 237 Page 144 Section 13 2 1 Is an error displayed on the network configuration diagram Are details of the error station selected on the network configuration diagram displayed on the Selected Station Communication Status Monitor screen e Is there any error log on the Network Event History screen 237 Page 159 Section 13 2 6 Corrective action e Check the channel numbers gt Page 191 Section 16 7 8 e Check the details of the communication error on the Selected Station Communication Status Monitor screen Perform the troubleshooting described on the Error details screen gt Page 153 Section 13 2 2 7 e Click the button displayed when a error occurs on the Selected Station Communication Status Monitor screen and perform the troubleshooting described on the Error details screen lt _ gt Page 153 Section 13 2 2 7 The following are the causes for when details of the error st
107. J71LP21S 25 Q80BD J71LP21G Q80BD J71LP21GE and Q80BD J71BR11 MELSECNET H interface board Product name of the software package for CC Link IE Field Network board Name for the utility included in the SW1DNC CCIEF B CC Link IE Field Network software package General product name for SW8D5C GPPW E SW8D5C GPPW EA SW8D5C GPPW EV SW8D5C GPPW EVA General product name for SWnDNC GXW2 E SWnDNC GXW2 EA n denotes the version number Generic term for the MELSEC Q L series CPU module Generic term for the QJ71GF11 T2 and LJ71GF11 T2 CC Link IE Field Network master local module Abbreviation for the LJ72GF15 T2 CC Link IE Field Network head module Abbreviation for the NZ2GF ETB CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module Generic term for the following modules e CC Link IE Field Network module e CC Link IE Controller Network module e MELSECNET H module e MELSECNET 10 module A MELSEC L series module that has functions other than input or output such as A D converter module and D A converter module Station that controls the entire network Cyclic and transient transmission can be performed with all stations One master station is required per network Cyclic and transient transmission can be performed with the master station and other local stations The local station controls modules such as a CPU module by its programs Station where cyclic transmission of bit by bit input output signals is performed with the master station Station wh
108. Juaa3 yzZ 0L 19 J9WBJE d YIOMJON Bumaes COL 118 Screen button Clear button Clears all settings Check button Checks whether the settings are correct 1 Combination of detection method and event condition The following table shows results and events of the combination of detection method and event condition Detection Event o Device Description Method Condition ON An event occurs at the rising edge of the device RX Edge Detect ny Or An event occurs at the falling edge of the device ON An event occurs by turning ON the device SB Level Detect oF An event occurs by turning OFF the device An event occurs when values match First time only RWw Edge Detect An event occurs when values do not match First time only RWr An event occurs when values change First time only SW An event occurs when values match Level Detect An event occurs when values do not match RECV Function Edge Detect A An event occurs when a specified channel receives data CHAPTER 10 SETTING PARAMETERS 10 2 5 Driver setting Set the driver WDT monitoring time transient timeout monitoring time link refresh cycle and RECV function reception buffer Display contents W View gt Network Parameter gt CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting screen gt Driver Setting Driver WDT Monitoring Time RECY Function Receive Buffer i Use driver WDT Function No Setting 200 xi ms f Setting Transient Timeout
109. LED status K Page 192 Section 16 7 11 e Checking channel numbers K Page 191 Section 16 7 8 2 Checking the error check the screen displayed on a personal computer a Checking with the operating system The driver operation status can be checked with Device Manager or event viewer e Checking personal computer and operating system K Page 187 Section 16 7 5 e Checking on Device Manager screen K Page 188 Section 16 7 6 e Checking operations with event viewer K Page 189 Section 16 7 7 b Checking with the utility The board status and network status can be checked with the utility e Checking channel numbers K Page 191 Section 16 7 8 e Checking operations with board diagnostics 4 Page 191 Section 16 7 9 e Checking operations with tests Page 191 Section 16 7 10 e Checking LED status K Page 192 Section 16 7 11 e Checking network status with CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics k Page 196 Section 16 7 12 e Checking network status with monitoring link special relays SB and link special registers SW E Page 197 Section 16 7 13 e Checking communication status with monitoring access target device L gt Page 197 Section 16 7 14 185 poujew Busy 2791 16 7 1 Checking installation environment Check if the installation environment is within the general specification gt Page 38 Section 3 1 or clear from noise Check Corrective action Is the ambient temperature within the specified Keep the ambient tem
110. MITSUBISHI Mitsubishi PC Interface Board MELSEG CC Link IE Field Network Interface Board User s Manual For SW1DNC CCIEF B Q80BD J71GF11 T2 Q81BD J71GF11 T2 W B m SAFETY PRECAUTIONSO Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly Note that these precautions apply only to this product Refer to the user s manual of your CPU module for safety precautions on programmable controller systems In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels A WARNING and A CAUTION A N WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under N CAUTION may lead to e e e e E we SS SS SS serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference Design Precautions NWARNING O Configure safety circuits external to the programmable controller to ensure that the entire system operates saf
111. Monitor Hide Disconnected Station Legend Disconnected station monitor area The icon indicates a station that has not yet performed data link Icons other than Ml indicate stations that had performed data link before disconnection 7 Selected station communication status monitor Display status of the selected station Screen display Click the button to display Selected Station Communication Status Monitor Q81 the Error details screen Error details Selected station No 1 2 Mode Online MAC Address IP Address 192 168 1 1 5 broken cable to PORT2 of the host station If PORT2 of the host station is not ure that in the PORT1 network the total number of slave stations match ti i i ese conditions are normal it may use make total number of slave stations set in the maste n If the jule failure Replace jodule Display contents Display the station number and operating status Normal 1 Operating status Station No 1 Enor Error Data link is continued yellow Station No 1 Enor Error Data link is stopped red Station No Unset Station number is not specified red 2 Mode Display the mode It is not displayed if a station number is not specified 3 MAC address Display the MAC address 4 IP Address Displays an IP address only when it is set Display LED status and communication status of PORT1 and PORT2 5 LED Display the
112. ND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES This chapter explains the software package installation and uninstallation 6 1 Installation and Uninstallation Precautions The following are the precautions when installing and uninstalling the software package Log on as a user having administrator authority Make sure to close other applications running on Windows including resident software such as antivirus software before installation and uninstallation The installer may not work normally because the update program of operating system or other companies software such as Windows Update and Java update may start automatically Please install the driver after changing the setting of the update program not to start automatically Check if the display settings on the Device Manager or other relevant functions are correct then install an appropriate display driver or update the Windows operating system The language switching function of the operation system set by Regional and Language Options on the Control Panel screen is not supported The installation or uninstallation may not work normally if the language setting is changed When using Windows Server 2012 or Windows 8 NET Framework 3 5 is required Enable the NET Framework 3 5 including NET 2 0 or 3 0 in Turn Windows features on or off on the control panel A network drive cannot be specified as the installation destination 8 suo nexaJg UOl e e SUIUM pue uonej
113. No error dedicated instruction Incorrect transient data Double dedicated instructions received Incorrect transient data Corrective action e Add a master station to the network e Correct the request command at the request source and retry the operation e Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and take action e Check if the cables and switching hub are connected properly e If the request source resides in another network check if the routing parameters are correctly set and take corrective action e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Although change of the target station number was attempted online from the master station the target station does not have the online station number setting function e Check the manual for the target station for availability of the station number setting function e If the function is supported by the model please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Check the communication status of the station whose station number will be changed Station number change was attempted for the own station master station e Check if no station number has been set for the target station of station number change e For the target station of station number change a
114. REx mdRandWEx mdReceive mdSend mdControl mdDevRst mdDevSet mdRandR mdRandW or mdTypeRead function O If other station access including the programmable controller CPU other than the Redundant CPU is made to 257 or more stations simultaneously communication path may not be automatically switched The following table explains details of the special relay and special registers to be monitored when estimating the occurrence of path switching Other system error flag No of module for which system switching request is issued from the network module in own system No of module for which system switching request is issued from the network module in another system Name Descrip OFF No error ON Error No of module for which system switching request is issued from the network module in own system No of module for which system switching request is issued from the network module in another system Description details e Turns ON when an error occurs by redundant system error check Turns ON when any of bits for SD1600 turns ON e Remains OFF when no errors are present e Any of the following bits turns on corresponding to the No of the module for which system switching request is issued from the network module in own system e Turned OFF by the system after the error of the relevant module is resolved by the user Each bit b15 to b11 to b1 bO 0 OFF sD1590 o Jo gt 0 1 0 4 ON
115. RT2 0 A line error is not currently occurred on the transmission path of the each station s PORT2 1 A line error is currently occurred on the transmission path of the each station s PORT 2 When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned ON the stored status is cleared b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO swo1so 16 15 14 1312 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 4 iS PORT2 error frame o A detection each station swo1s3 64 63 62 161 60 50 158 57 56 55 154 53 52 151 50 49 gt SW0157 swo154 80 79 78 77 7e 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 swo155 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 Sw0156 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 swor57 120 119 118 197 116 195 114 113 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status each station SWO0AO to SWO0A7 Stores the parameter status for each station 0 No parameter error 1 Parameter error found b15 b14 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO swor7o 16 15 14 13 12 nfo 98 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Sw0171 Swo172 swot73 64 63 62 61 60 50 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 swo17al so 7o 78
116. Ser Re ae Ry een ae rae ne sei eran cena 16 TE RMO ae A es ct enn Go en en Pee ra eg ah oie an A eee gore NOT Pes Gey 18 FPN IRIN GE SI eee cae ee reenter a Perea er EE E o gel eee 20 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 21 iol CC ENK IE Field Ne iWork ias A Vee eee ees 21 1 2 CC Link IE Field Network Board 2 sovuui ecw sesenta ata db 23 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 25 2 1 System Configuration Using CC Link IE Field Network Board 25 2 2 Single Network System cc dd a e bie th iwage 26 2 3 MUIPNEIWORG Systems adas adhd ha ica Soha elo ies baad bo ses O80 32 24 NetWork Componentes aces a ee ae bd SEM ae eee ane BE eee as See ees 33 BAW A O o tad whee ee eae 33 2A HAUS eid hee OR nee ae 33 20 Operating Environment amador svete da fig no ee See de Me Oa A Mies 34 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 38 3 1 General SpecilicalOnS remitida SR Ge a we 80 Nd ace Aer eed aa Es 38 32 Performance SpeciiCaliOns a daa dde Hoe a waren eet 39 3 3 List of Buffer Memory Addresses na nanan AAA Cee ee pie oe 40 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 43 4 1 Procedure Before Operation 0 00000 cc ee ee ee eee eee eee es 43 A2 iPatiNames A A Ce Ree ba 44 AZ Installation eo Ses Semen led eras ot 2 guide nesta Gh be ace ry ened 47 ASH Handling pPreCcaulOns ecdad oid te that h este ued ewes eee thal bead oud awe eles 47 43 2 Installation environments A Dd dena ea ale O84 IS A 48 4 3 3 Procedure for replacing mounti
117. Station setting own station 2 Baton pass status own station Stores the network type of own station O ON Field Network Availability Description Master Local station station Stations specified in Reserved station function disable temporary error invalid station setting SW0010 to SW0017 are temporarily canceled from reserved stations OFF No request ON Request issued Stations specified in Reserved station function disable temporary error invalid station setting SW0010 to SW0017 are returned to reserved stations Only stations that were temporarily canceled can be returned to reserved stations OFF No request ON Request issued This stores the data reception status of the own station s channel 1 OFF No received data ON Received data found Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF This stores the data reception status of the own station s channel 2 OFF No received data ON Received data found Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores the mode of own station OFF Online ON Not online This stores if the own station is a master station or not OFF Not master station ON Master station This stores if the own station is a local station or not OFF Not local station ON Local station Conditions e This is enabled when the Station setting own station 1 SB0044 is OFF
118. Status change Link up or link down 2011 01 07 14 56 11 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 2011 01 07 14 56 00 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Data link status 2011 01 07 14 56 00 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 2011 01 07 14 56 00 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 2011 01 07 14 55 41 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Data link status 2011 01 07 14 55 41 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 2011 01 07 14 55 41 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 2011 01 07 14 55 04 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Data link status 2011 01 07 14 55 04 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 2011 01 07 14 55 04 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 0000 00 00 00 00 00 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Data link status 0000 00 00 00 00 00 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 0000 00 00 00 00 00 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 0000 00 00 00 00 00 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Data link status 0000 00 00 00 00 00 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down
119. Stores the operating status during a CPU stop error due to parameters SB0073 specified for CPU stop OFF Stop O error ON Continue Stores the reserved station specification status due to parameters The station number set for a reserved station can be checked by Reserved station Reserved station a SB0074 oo specification SWO0CO to SW00C7 specification status B OFF Not specified ON Specified Stores the Error invalid station setting status due to parameters The station E E number set for the error invalid station can be checked by Error invalid station Error invalid station SB0075 l setting SWOODO to SW00D7 O setting status m OFF Not specified ON Specified i Stores the parameter reception status from the master station Parameter reception SB0077 aie OFF Reception completed O ON Reception not completed Stores the setting status of the loopback function configured by the parameter Loopback function SB0078 OFF Not used setting status 9 ON Used Stores the network event history occurrence OFF No event history ON Event history found If the event history is found the cumulative number of network event history SBOO7A Event history status O can be checked by the Event count SW007A Depending on the timing of the link refresh the Event count SW007A and the update may be offset by one sequence scan This area is cleared when Event count clear SB0009 is turned ON Stores the own station
120. System Hardware Driver Signing the driver may not be installed Select Ignore Install the software anyway and don t ask for my approval or Warn Prompt me each time to choose an action and install the driver 174 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 3 Troubleshooting for Personal Computer and Utility The following shows the troubleshooting for error for operation of a personal computer or utility e Personal computer does not start or shuts down 5 Page 175 Section 16 3 1 e Utility does not startup Page 176 Section 16 3 2 e The screen or operation is abnormal 1 gt Page 176 Section 16 3 3 e Corrective action displayed on the screen is not effective Page 177 Section 16 3 4 e Personal computer operates slowly 5 Page 178 Section 16 3 5 16 3 1 Personal computer does not start or shuts down When the personal computer on which the board is installed is not started or the system shut down or system reset is occurred check the items following the procedure shown below Point Do not delete or disable the driver on the Device Manager screen when the board is normally recognized If it is deleted or disabled the operating system may shut down blue screen 1 Uninstall the board and check if the personal computer is started e Checking personal computer and operating system Page 187 Section 16 7 5 2 After restarting the personal computer check if there is any error e Checking on Event Viewer s
121. Turn on order To avoid incorrect input from slave stations turn on slave stations first and then the master station W3IS S YIOMJON 9 BUIS ZZ 31 2 3 Multi Network System The multi network system is a system in which multiple networks are connected by some relay stations Up to 239 networks can be connected CC Link IE Controller Network Network No 3 g Relay station Relay station f Network No 1 gt C Network No 2 E CC Link IE CC Link IE Field Network Field Network Point Cyclic transmission is available only in the same network Transient transmission is available with other networks as well as the same network Communications can be made with stations on up to the eighth network the number of relay stations 7 Page 74 Section 5 3 2 32 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 4 Network Components The CC Link IE Field Network consists of the following 2 4 1 Cables For wiring use the 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet cables Sica EE The following conditioning cables a RJ45 connector IEEE802 3 1000BASE T Double shielded STP Straight cable e ANSI TIA EIA 568 B Category 5e Point O For CC Link IE Field Network wiring use the recommended wiring components by CC Link Partner Association O Cables for CC Link IE Controller Network cannot be used for CC Link IE Field Network 1 Product Cables for CC Link IE Field Network are available from Mitsubi
122. Visual Studio 2012 Visual Basic English version 1 2 ges me ye Microsoft Visual Studio NET 2003 Visual C Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 Visual C Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 Visual C Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Visual C Microsoft Visual Studio 2012 Visual C Windows XP 64 bit version and Windows Vista 64 bit version are not supported For a combination of the operation system and the programming language refer to the Microsoft Knowledge Base 64 bit version user programs cannot be created using MELSEC data link library Use Visual Studio 2010 or later 1 Instructions for personal computer a PCI standard When a personal computer which is not compliant with the PCI or PCI Express standard is used troubles caused by failures such as a contact failure or operation error may occur This board may not operate when a PCI Express slot for graphics is used For details of the number of boards that can be installed installation slots and occupied slots refer to 2 gt Page 39 Section 3 2 2 Instructions for operating system a Supported version of SW1DNC CCIEF B Supported version Operating system Q80BD J71GF11 T2 Q81BD J71GF11 T2 Windows XP 32 bit version Windows Vista 32 bit version All versions Windows Server 2003 R2 32 bit version Windows Server 2003 R2 64 bit version Version 1 02C or later Windows Server 2008 32 bit version Al
123. Voltage Directive Appendix 15 External Dimensions Q80BD J71GF11 T2 Q81BD J71GF11 T2 15 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL In this manual pages are organized and the symbols are used as shown below The following page illustration is for explanation purpose only and the content is different from the actual page CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS 5 2 5 Cyclic transmission stop and restart During debugging and other operations cyclic transmission can be stopped Data reception from the slave stations The chapter of and data transmission from the own station can be stopped The stopped cyclic transmission can be restarted sh f CS l the current page SNOWS reterence Transient transmission is not stopped 23 Page 157 Section 13 2 5 h IS SNOWN pages Station number 0 X gt Mastar staon i Slave station i Station 4 Station number 1 number 1 Station Station number 2 number 2 Station Station number 3 number 3 Link refresh RY RWw Station Station Station Station Station an number 3 number 3 SAN The section of y Cyclic Q transmission g 2 the current page stopped DA 3 is shown E 1 Setting method F A O Cyclic transmission stop and restart are operated on the Link Start Stop screen 2 gt 7 Page 157 Section s 13 2 5 3 5 s 7 a Point shows Point s notes that req uires O The link start stop is not available in loop test mode i tt ti When the board is reset or the system is powered off and then on attention E
124. a board to be tested on the Board Channel No 181 Diagnostics screen in CC IE Field Utility 2 gt Page 142 Section 13 1 3 Set Mode to Self Loopback Test and click the Mode Self Loopback Test Start Test Start Test button lt Normal completion gt 4 The result is displayed on Test Result field Test Result If the test completes abnormally replace the Ethernet Self Loopback Test was normaly completed cable and execute the test again Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative with the detailed problem description lt Abnormal completion gt ka Result Self Loopback Test was abnormaly completed 59 a9eqdo0 19s y Sp pueog au jo s sa suojepuezg Bun M 310499 SIJS L S y Point O When conducting the self loopback test use a normal Ethernet cable lt 7 Page 33 Section 2 4 1 53 4 6 Wiring This section explains the cable wiring and precautions For cables and hubs used for the wiring and network configuration refer to the system configuration lt gt Page 25 CHAPTER 2 4 6 1 Wiring Precautions The following explains wiring precautions 1 Precautions for turning on e Turn off the external power supply for the system in all phases before installing the board or starting wiring Failure to do so may result in electric shock damage to the product or malfunction e After installation of the board and wiring attach the cover
125. ace the other optional boards Does the board operate normally if uninstall the other optional boards Does the board operate normally on another e Reinstall the operating system after formatting HD personal computer e Repair or replace the personal computer For the problem of the personal computer or operating system consult the personal computer or operating system manufacturer 187 yu wuoaua vonejado Buey y 9L poyjau Buloy 2 91 16 7 6 Checking on Device Manager screen Check if the board is displayed on the Windows Device Manager screen Check Corrective action The board or driver is not installed e If the board is not installed install the board If the board is already installed check the board installation status and reinstall the board e Reinstall the software package Page 169 Section 16 2 1 e If the board operates normally on other personal computer the personal computer may have any problems In this case repair Is the driver name of the board not displayed on the Device Manager screen or replace the personal computer If the board does not operate normally on other personal computer replace the board The board installation failed e Reinstall the software package E Page 169 Section 16 2 1 e Check the board installation status and reinstall the board e If the board operates normally on other personal computer the personal computer may have any problems In this case
126. ackages For details of MELSECPowerManager refer to the following appendix gt Page 271 Appendix 13 2 When uninstallation is completed normally When the uninstallation is completed normally the icons registered in the Windows Start are deleted 3 When uninstallation is failed When the uninstallation is failed take corrective actions following the troubleshooting Page 169 Section 16 2 2 90 CHAPTER 7 OVERVIEW OF CC IE FIELD UTILITY CHAPTER 7 OVERVIEW OF CCIE FIELD UTILITY CC IE Field Utility is software to display settings and status of the CC Link IE Field Network board For installing and uninstalling the utility 277 Page 87 CHAPTER 6 7 1 Overview Use CC IE Field Utility to perform the following functions Item Description Description Meu Reference Check the hardware of the Bus I F function of the Bus I F test CC Link IE Field Network board Check the memory of the CC Link IE Field Network Memory test board Test before l l Diagnostics gt Ae Check the hardware in the CC Link IE Field wiring H W test Board Diagnostics Page 52 Section 4 5 3 Network board Test the hardware of the CC Link IE Field Network Page 51 Section 4 5 1 Page 52 Section 4 5 2 Self loopback test board alone including the send receive circuit of Page 53 Section 4 5 4 the transmission system and cables View gt Page 109 CHAPTER 10 Network Parameter Parameter Setting Set
127. ackup and Restore Back up your computer Restore files from backup Windows Anytime Upgrade Get more features with a new edition of Windows 7 Administrative Tools Free up disk space Defragment your hard drive 8 Create and format hard disk partitions View event logs Schedule tasks 4 Set the slide bar Never notify and click the Choose when to be notified about changes to your computer b utt O n User Account Control helps prevent potentially harmful programs from making changes to your computer Tell me more about User Account Control settings Always notify gi Never notify me when e Programs try to install software or make changes to my computer Imake changes to Windows settings Not recommended Choose this only if you need to use programs that are not certified for Windows 7 because they do not support User Account Control y Setting completed 4 2 Allowing operation without displaying warning message The following shows a procedure for allowing an operation without displaying a warning message A Getting Started E3 Connect to a Projector Calculator DD Windows Fax and Scan A Remote Desktop Connection As Magnifier gt All Programs Documents Pictures Music Computer Control Panel Devices and Printers Default Programs Help and Support Shut down lioa GO Control Panel y 5 Search Control Panel Adjust your computer
128. ade Tile windows in overlapping display Tile Vertically Tile windows vertically Tile Horizontally Tile windows horizontally Arrange Icons Arrange the icons at the bottom of the window Close All Close all open windows Switch to other window Display the open window Display a list of open windows Window A Page 98 Section 8 2 3 Also open or arrange specified windows Help Reference Manual Display the manual Page 100 Section 8 3 About Display product information such as the version de N lt 9 5 E E 7 93 CHAPTER 8 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS This chapter explains the screen configuration and basic operations of CC IE Field Utility 8 1 Starting and Exiting This section explains the operation methods for starting and exiting CC IE Field Utility 1 Starting up Start up CC IE Field Utility Operating procedure 1 Z Select MELSEC gt CC IE Field Board gt CC IE Field Utility from Start of Windows 1 Start screen All apps or Start All Programs All Programs fm MELSEC B Device Monitor Utility ri CC IE Field Board Manual E MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual S CC IE Field Board Program Sample Log Off 0 Shut Down fm CCIE Field Board Af CCIE Field Utility Point O Starting CC IE Field Utility with the validated user account control When CC IE Field Utility is started while user account control UAC is validated the following warni
129. age File Action View Help es 0E alH amp Services Local H gt e n MELSECPowerManager Stop the service Pause the service Restart the service I Network List Service amp Network Store Interface Offline Files y _ Description Status Startup Type Disabled Log On As Local Service Disabled Disabled Automatic D Automatic D Manual Local System Local System Local System Local System Local System py Microsoft St IVIECTOSOTE IN AMEW e Microsoft NET Framew C Microsoft NET Framew e Microsoft NET Framew O Microsoft iSCSI Initiator eT Microsoft Software Sha Multimedia Class Sched D Net Msmq Listener Ada Ci Net Pipe Listener Adapter Receives act C Net Tcp Listener Adapter Ci Net Tcp Port Sharing Se Ch Netlogon Gh Network Access Protecti C Network Connections Microsoft Microsoft Manages In Manual Automatic Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Manual Manages so Local System Local System Network Servic Local Service Enables rela Receives act Receives act Local Service Provides abi Local Service Maintains a The Networ Manages O Identifies th Collects an Local System Network Servic Local System Local Service Network Servic Local Service Local System Local System Local Service Manual Manual Manual Automatic Automatic Manual Automatic Manua
130. ameter error Link scan mode constant link scan time setting error Hardware error Parameter error Device range assignment error Parameter error Corrective action e Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and take action e When the receiving station encountered overloading of transient data send the data from the source after a give time has elapsed e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation e Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected properly e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation e When the mode of the master station is Online High Speed Mode change it to Online Normal Mode and retry the operation e Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected properly e Adjust the following settings at the request source of transient and retry the operation D2A3H Number of data frame length D2A4H Header information D2A5H Target station number D2A6H Request source number D2A7H to D2A8H Header information D2A9H Target network number D2AAH Target station number D2ABhH Network number of the request source D2ACH Station number of the request source D2ADH Number of data frame length e The own station received transient data that is addressed to another station on the route Check and correct the network and target sta
131. and station number in the switch setting 9 CCPASET execution error at ange ot 3 oar l O D630H and execute the instruction again in the condition in which the network parameters local station are not set O ee No station specified for A D7O1H Reserved station function e Specify relevant station s in Reserved station function disable temporary error disable temporary error invalid invalid station setting SW0010 to SW0017 and retry the operation station setting Temporary error invalid station setting cancel or reserved i e For a local station temporary error invalid station setting cancel and reserved D706H station function disable enable station function disable enable cannot be executed Retry it on the master station request execution error when the own station is a local station Temporary error invalid station setting cancel or reserved e Temporary error invalid station setting cancel by SB0010 and SB0011 and D70BH station function disable enable reserved station function disable enable by SB0012 and SB0013 cannot be request execution error when executed at the same time concurrently requested to e Turn off all bits in SB0010 to SB0013 and turn on only one bit of them in the relay multiple stations Data link start stop instruction D720H e Check the setting and then stop or start data link out of range 207 Error code D721H D722H D723H D724H D725H D726H D727H D7
132. are and Sound Ds or other media automatically Printer Mouse Programs Uninstall a program Change startup programs Mobile PC Change battery settings Adjust commonly used mobility settings y 1 Documents Pictures Music Search Recent Items Computer Network Connect To Control Panel Default Programs Help and Support User Accounts Add or remove user accounts Appearance and Personalization Change desktop background Customize colors j n resolution Clock Language and Region pills Change keyboards or other input methods Additional Options y To the next page 262 Open Control Panel Select User Accounts From the previous page y ajo om 2 3 gt Control Panel p User accounts o wg Beach o Control Panel Home User Accounts System and Maintenance Change your account picture Add or remove user accounts Change your Windows password lt and Internet Windows CardSpace Hardware and Sound Manage Information Cards that are used to log on to online services Programs Mobile PC User Accounts Appearance and Make changes to your user account Change your password Remove your password Eee Administrator Change your picture Password protected Change your account name Change your account type my environment Manage another account Tum User Account Control on or off E sE e A gt EN lt User Accoun
133. ase consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Change the station type value in the setting data to any of 0 to 3 and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Correct the link device offset or size of slave station s in the setting data and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Set the target station number in the REMFR REMTO instruction to the station number of an intelligent device station e Reconnect the target station of the REMFR REMTO instruction e Set any of 1 to 239 to Switch 1 network No in the intelligent function module switch setting of the master local module e When activating as a master station set O to Switch 2 in the intelligent function module switch setting of the master local module e When activating as a local station by the CCPASET instruction use a master local module with a serial number whose first five digits are 12072 or higher e When activating as a local station set a value within the range from 3101H to 3178H to Switch 2 in the intelligent function module switch setting of the master local module e Set 0 to Switch 3 in the intelligent function module switch settin
134. aster station Slave station Slave station Slave station Station No 0 Station No 1 Station No 2 Station No 3 No data link error will be detected on NA is this station even in the case of an error or power OFF Network Configuration Setting REA Setting SUE Setting e 2 PLCs Se Fo Station Type ea Ear Invalid Station ptf Local Station 6 ooo oo0F 8 0000 0007 Mosetting_ l ES A o cone ono he SE cn C a finteligent Device station t ozo oo el omoj oor Invalid station vi Select Invalid Station 2 Temporary error invalid station This function is useful for various operations such as replacing a slave station during a data link by temporarily setting it as an error invalid station For details refer to 2 gt Page 162 Section 13 2 8 83 uonouny Bulnes uonels pijeauj 40413 lesodua pue uones pIJeAu JOU 9 G 9 84 Event Function This function checks event conditions every link scan and notifies events to the user program when the event conditions are met By using this function the link devices can be monitored efficiently without reading link devices regularly by the user program Personal computer Board E Setting of event condition Conditions 5 Event condition Input Format DEC y Ouser program Event No main mdOpen 181 1 mdClose path 8path Event notification 4 mdWaitBdEvent path eventno Receive the event notific
135. at the power buttons do Change when the computer sleeps Backup and Restore Back up yourcomputer Restore files from backup BitLocker Drive Encryption Protect your computer by encrypting data on your disk de 6 ly Manage BitLocker ragment your hard drive Create and format hard disk partitions Schedule tasks disk space View event logs 3 Double click Services Organize v ir Favorites Name Date modified Type HZ Desktop a Component Services 7 13 2009 9 57 PM Shortcut B Downloads AY Computer Management 7 13 2009 9 54 PM Shortcut 3 Recent Places Data Sources ODBC 7 13 2009 9 53 PM Shortcut fl Event Viewer 7 13 2009 9 54 PM Shortcut 3 Libraries 8 SCSI Initiator 7 13 2009 9 54 PM Shortcut E Documents Za Local Security Policy 11 18 2011 2 30PM Shortcut al Music 53 Performance Monitor 7 13 2009 9 53 PM Shortcut 5 Pictures rad Print Management 11 18 2011 2 30 PM Shortcut BE Videos 7 13 2009 9 54 PM Shortcut fem Configuration 7 13 2009 9 53PM Shortcut tl Computer 5 Task Scheduler 7 13 2009 9 54 PM Shortcut EL 7 x64 en C P Windows Firewall with Advanced Security 7 13 2009 9 54 PM Shortcut a 2003 x64 jp D aj Windows Memory Diagnostic 7 13 2009 9 53 PM Shortcut Ga Data Disk E 10 Windows PowerShell Modules 7 13 2009 10 32 PM Shortcut Ga 2008 x64 en F a 2008R2 x64 jp G Su Network y To the next page From the previous p
136. ata for traceability and management diagnostic data for equipment predictive maintenance can be collected at high speed and monitored A control system using a programming language such as C language can be configured when a personal computer is used as a master station Control data and logging data can be collected at high speed when a personal computer is used as a local station A control system using a programming language such as C language can be configured when a personal computer is used as a master station peog MIOMJON PlSl4 31 AYUIT OO CL Control data and logging data can be collected at high speed when a personal computer is used as a local station 23 24 3 User programs created using existing boards can be utilized For user programs to use CC Link IE Field Network board the function level compatibility can be maintained because the common interface MELSEC data link functions with the existing boards can be used Therefore user programs created using the existing boards such as CC Link IE Controller Network board CC Link Ver 2 board MELSECNET H board can be utilized for CC Link IE Field Network board Program creation time can be shortened since the users who previously used the existing boards do not need to create a new user program CC Link Ver 2 board etc User programs created using the existing boards can be utilized main mdOpen 181 1 amp path mdSen
137. ata from other stations and sending its own data Screen display W Diagnostics gt CC IE Field Diagnostics 2 gt CC IE Field Diagnostics screen lt gt Link Start Stop button Link Start Stop Network Information Connected Station Information Network Type ke IE Field Network No it Station Type Master Station Station No 0 Link Start Stop Setting Contents All Stations Information Select All Clear All Selections Oj o Operating Master Station Pt 2 stopped Local Station Link Start Stop Executing Contents Link Start Link Stop J Forced Link Start Forced Link Start will be executed For the station that is link stopped by jon that is link other stations or the stati stopped by special relay special register Issuing request for link start stop contents in stations that are on selected status in all stations i j Link ions information status might not be changed immediately because of circuit status factor Please reopen window or check in network configuration when there is no change in lease re link status Close Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Network Information 7 Connected Station Display the network information of the connected station Information Link Start Stop Setting Contents Display the link status of all stations on the same network which are performing the data All Stations Inf
138. ation Two stations are connected through a switching hub Switching hubs are in cascade connection 152 Actual system configuration Master station nhi Station No 0 pni nup El i Intelligent device station Station No 1 Station No 0 Switching hub A Switching hub Intelligent device Intelligent device Intelligent device Intelligent device station Station No 1 station Station No 2 station Station No 3 station Station No 4 Network configuration screen display Branches are not displayed in the network configuration display area Connected Station Master 0 Intelli 1 Only one branch is displayed Connected Station Master 0 Divergence Intelli 1 Intelli 2 Intelli 3 Intelli 4 CHAPTER 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 6 Disconnected station monitor area Displays a disconnected station that has been set in the network configuration settings but has not yet performed data link However even if a disconnected station had performed data link it is displayed in this area in the following cases e A station that was reconnected to a network after cable disconnection insertion or power off and power on of the system and remains disconnected e Data link unexecuted stationsA disconnected station with the station icon deleted in the network map display area by clicking the hide Disconnected Station button Monitor Status TT Monitoring Stop
139. ation station The own station s cyclic transmission is restarted OFF No start direction ON Start direction enabled during start up SB0000 Link start own station Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e For SBO000 to SB0003 this is enabled when only one of them is turned ON The own station s cyclic transmission is stopped OFF No stop direction ON Stop direction enabled during start up SB0001 Link stop own station Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e For SB0000 to SB0003 this is enabled when only one of them is turned ON O O Cyclic transmission of the entire system is restarted The station where cyclic transmission is restarted is specified by the Link stop start direction SW0000 to SW0008 OFF No start direction SB0002 System link start ON Start direction enabled during start up x Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e For SB0000 to SB0003 this is enabled when only one of them is turned ON Cyclic transmission of the entire system is stopped The station where cyclic transmission is stopped is specified by the Link stop start direction SW0000 to SW0008 OFF No stop direction SB0003 System link stop ON Stop direction enabled during start up Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e For SB0
140. ation number 3 1 Setting method Input status of data link faulty station can be set in the Network Operation Setting L gt Page 116 Section 10 2 3 Intelligent device station Station number 2 Station Station Station Station Station number al Station number H Station number Al Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 N Station number 1 Station number 2 number 3 Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 RWr number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 RWw number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 N m e e e e e e e e e e e e E E e E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E AAA A E E 11 Bunas UOI JES JOINS Yul e ep JO sn e s indu VAALS uoIssIWSsSueJL OIOAD Z S 5 2 5 Cyclic transmission stop and restart 12 During debugging and other operations cyclic transmission can be stopped Data reception from the slave stations and data transmission from the own station can be stopped The stopped cyclic transmission can be restarted Transient transmission is not stopped i Station number 1 Station number 2 gt e Station number 3 Personal computer Master station Board RX RWr Slave station Slave station Slave station RX RWr Station number 1 User program e e e e e e m e e O m Station number 2 SN we A Station numbe
141. ation are not displayed e Master station duplication Station number duplication e Slave station type error Check the Board Diagnostics screen and identify the cause of the error Page 142 Section 13 1 If the error station is a module identify the cause of the error with System Monitor of GX Works2 e Check the detailed information and identify the cause of the error CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 7 13 Checking network status with monitoring link special relays SB and link special registers SW Check Is SB0047 Baton pass status own station faulty ON Is SWOOAO to SWOO0A7 Baton pass status each station faulty ON Is SB0049 Data link status own station faulty ON Is there a cyclic transmission error station in SWOOBO to SWO0B7 Data link status each station Is SBO04A SB004B Own station s CPU status 1 Own station s CPU status 2 faulty ON Is there an error station in SW0100 to SW0107 SW0110 to SW0117 CPU Stop error Continuation error Check link special relays SB and link special registers with the Device Monitor Utility lt _ gt Page 130 Section 12 2 Corrective action e Perform the troubleshooting for when the transient transmission cannot be performed at own station 1 gt Page 184 Section 16 6 2 e Perform the troubleshooting for when the transient transmission cannot be performed at station in which baton pass error is occurring E Page 184 Secti
142. ation number can be calculated using the formula below e Offset buffer memory address 19456 station number 1 x 2 e Size buffer memory address 19457 station number 1 x 2 2 RY offset size information Address 19712 to 19951 4D00H to 4DEFH The areas to store the RY start number and number of points for each station No Buffer memory addresses 19712 4D00H Station No 1 Offset 19713 4D01H Station No 1 Size in units of words 19714 4D02H Station No 2 Offset 19715 4D03H Station No 2 Size in units of words 19950 4DEEH StationNo 120 Offset 19951 4DEFH Station No 120 Size in units of words The offset and size buffer memory address for each station number can be calculated using the formula below e Offset buffer memory address 19712 station number 1 x 2 e Size buffer memory address 19713 station number 1 x 2 220 APPENDIX 3 RWw offset size information Address 19968 to 20207 4E00H to 4EEFH The areas to store the RWw start number and number of points for each station number Buffer memory addresses 19968 4E00H Station No 1 Offset 19969 4E01H Station No 1 Size in units of words 19970 4E02H Station No 2 Offset 19971 4E03H Station No 2 Size in units of words 20206 4EEEH Station No 120 Offset 20207 4EEFH Station No 120 Size in units of words The offset and size buffer memory address for each station number can be calculated using th
143. ation set in Network Configuration Setting The external device on a slave station outputs data input from the master station simultaneously with configuration of the station number setting Therefore set the CPU module to STOP or check that outputs from the external device will not cause a problem beforehand O A station number is not specified to the slave station For a method for canceling the station number set to the slave station in the CC Link IE Field Network Diagnostics refer to the manual of slave station being used usalos sonsouBelp Bulkejdsig ZZE MIOMION PIP 4 31 4UIT OD Buisoubeig zel 155 13 2 3 Communication test Perform a communication test on CC Link IE Field Network Screen display XO Diagnostics gt CC IE Field Diagnostics gt CC IE Field Diagnostics screen gt Communication Test button Communication Test Communication Test Contents Connected Station Own Target Station Communication Data Setting Network No 1 plese Network No 1 Data Lenath 100 Byte Station No 0 read Station No 1 Communication Count 1 Times Inward Communication Monitoring Time 5 Second Check the transient communication rounte From the connected station to the destination station Communication Test Result E Connected Station Own 4 Target Station Communication Information Outwar Network No 1 a gt Network No Communication Count 1 Times Station No 0 ined Station No 1 Communication Time 0 ms Outward
144. ation using SB SW change the mdWaitBdEvent function fT Link device RX RY RWw RWr change ho Network status Data reception status of specified channel RECV reception Set the event condition Link devices set for the event condition are checked every link scan When the event conditions are met an event notification is issued every link refresh cycle gt Page 119 Section 10 2 5 Receive the event notification using the mdWaitBdEvent function in the user program 1 Setting method Event conditions are set on the Event setting screen lt gt Page 117 Section 10 2 4 Specify event numbers set by the mdWaitBdEvent function of MELSEC data link library CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS 5 8 Loopback Function This function disconnects the station in which an error has occurred from the network and continues data link with the stations that are operating normally Stations connected after the faulty station can also continue data link Ring topology If an error occurs the system will loopback data sr Y continuing data link EZ AZ SL gt gt gt 2 gt gt BE aZ Line topology Stations after the error station are disconnected 4 y Error Te as E a E I A 57 E i E E a B E I Zi H 1 Setting procedure Configure the network in ring topology and set Use for Loopback Fu
145. atus each station SW00A0 to SW00A7 Buluwe1Bo1g UO SUOIINeDAId L GL 165 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter explains the identification of the causes and corrective actions when an error occurred Perform the troubleshooting in the following order in case of trouble 1 Basic checking procedure Check if there is the corresponding error symptom written in Error Examples 1 gt Page 167 Section 16 1 If the corresponding error could not be found check the cause by following the procedure shown below 1 2 Check if all the boards installed on a personal computer are displayed with the utility Checking channel numbers K Page 191 Section 16 7 8 Checking operations with board diagnostics Page 191 Section 16 7 9 Check the LED display of the board Check the LED status Page 192 Section 16 7 11 Check the error occurring at the utility Checking operations with tests Page 191 Section 16 7 10 Checking network status with CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics gt Page 196 Section 16 7 12 Checking network status with monitoring link special relays SB and link special registers SW E Page 197 Section 16 7 13 Check the access target device Check whether the system is performing as set on the parameters and programs by checking the performance of link device communication or transient transmission reception Checking communication status with monitoring access target device K Page
146. ave the power save mode standby hibernate e Windows XP e Windows Server 2003 R2 2 Behavior when entering the standby mode hibernation mode When the personal computer enters the power save mode standby hibernate the following message appears and the power save mode standby hibernate is disabled The CC Link IE Field Network board continues its operation and the data link remains normal lt When entering the standby mode gt System Standby Failed T The device driver For the MELSEC CC Link IE Field Controller device is preventing the machine From entering standby Please close all applications and try again IF the problem persists You may need to update this driver lt When entering the hibernation mode gt System Hibernation Failed The device driver For the MELSEC CC Link IE Field Controller device is preventing the machine From entering hibernation Please close all applications and try again IF the problem persists you may need to update this driver 3 Corrective action When the personal computer is set to enter the power save mode standby hibernate check and change the setting for when the computer s power button is pressed or the settings of the uninterruptible power supply system UPS on the control panel 268 APPENDIX Appendix 12 2 Behavior when the personal computer enters the power save mode hibernate sleep 1 Target operating system The following operating systems have
147. ay swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the board or cables or malfunctions due to poor contact When disconnecting the cable from the board do not pull the cable by the cable part Pulling the cable connected to the board may result in malfunction or damage to the board or cable Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the personal computer Such foreign matter may cause a fire failure or malfunction Do not install the communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Securely plug the communication cable to the connector of the board Then check for any incomplete connection Poor contact may cause an erroneous input or output Always ground the personal computer to the protective ground conductor Failure to do so may cause a malfunction Startup and Maintenance Precautions NWARNING O Turn off the power for the system in all phases before cleaning the board or retightening the board fixing screws Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause a failure or malfunction of the board O Turn off the power for the system in all phases before installing the board to or removing it from the personal computer Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the board to fail or malfunction O Do not connect or disconnect any communication cable while p
148. be performed on an own Page 158 Section 13 2 5 station 145 Diagnostics target Item Restrictions Reference Master Local station station Information Confirmation Set Events that can be collected differ Network Event History Page 159 Section 13 2 6 a tea to the station type Reserved Station Function Enable Station Function Enable A For a local station reserved Page 161 Section 13 2 7 Temporary Error Invalid Station C a stations temporary error invalid Restore stations can only be displayed Page 162 Section 13 2 8 Point O Starting from the Board Diagnostics screen CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics can also be started from the Board Diagnostics screen 237 Page 142 Section 13 1 Operating procedure 1 Select a station to be diagnosed from Select Station or Network Status C gt Page 148 1 in this section Page 150 5 in this section e A or is displayed on the module icon of the station where an error occurs e The module of the disconnected station whose data link is once established is displayed in black and white HE The icon of the disconnected station whose data link have never been established though the station is set in Network Configuration Setting is displayed on Data link unperformed stations located at the right of the screen However if the data link is once established the following disconnected station is displayed on Data link
149. ble reserved stations View station numbers set to ignore errors and temporarily ignore station errors 118 Ela 3 No Event occurrence date and time 0025 2011 01 07 14 57 30 Master Stat 0024 2011 01 07 14 56 11 laster 0023 2011 01 07 14 56 11 laster Stat 0022 2011 01 07 14 56 11 Master Stati lt lt Own St gt gt Stat 0021 2011 01 07 14 56 00 Master Stati lt lt Own St gt gt Stati 0020 2011 01 07 14 56 00 Master Stati lt lt Own St gt gt Stat nge k down 0019 2011 01 07 14 56 00 Master Stati lt lt 0wn St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 0018 2011 01 07 14 55 41 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Data link status 0017 2011 01 07 14 55 41 Master Stati lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Ik dow 0016 2011 01 07 14 55 41 Master Stati lt lt Own St gt gt Status cl Je 0015 2011 01 07 14 55 04 Master Stati lt lt Own St gt gt Status change 0014 2011 01 07 14 55 04 Master Stati lt lt Own St gt gt Status change 0013 2011 01 07 14 55 04 Master Stati lt lt Own St gt gt Stati 0012 0000 00 00 00 00 00 Master Stati lt lt Own St gt gt Stal 0011 0000 00 00 00 00 00 lt lt Own St gt gt Stat 0010 0000 00 00 00 00 00 Master Stati lt Own St gt gt Stat 0009 0000 00 00 00 00 00 Master Stati lt Own St gt gt Stat 0008 0000 00 00 00 00 00 Master Stati lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Lin 0007 0000 00 00 00 0
150. can be checked by Reserved station specification SW00C0 to SW00C7 O Depending on the timing of the link refresh Reserved station specification SW00C0 to SW00C7 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores if there are any error invalid stations OFF No error invalid stations ON Error invalid station found If an error invalid station is found the status of each station can be checked by Error invalid station setting SWOODO to SW00D7 Depending on the timing of the link refresh Error invalid station setting SWOODO to SW00D7 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores if there are any temporary error invalid stations OFF No temporary error invalid stations ON Temporary error invalid station found If a temporary error invalid station is found the status of each station can be checked by Temporary error invalid station setting SWO0EO to SWO00E7 Depending on the timing of the link refresh Temporary error invalid station setting SWOOEO to SW00E7 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF APPENDIX Availability Number Description Master Local station station Stores the RUN status of each station
151. ccept status Reserved station specification enabled status Constant link scan status Loopback status PORT1 linkup status own station PORT2 linkup status own station PORT1 error frame reception status own station PORT2 error frame reception status own station PORT1 error frame detection own station PORT2 error frame detection own station Scan mode setting information Description Turns ON when the Reserved station specification enable request SB0013 is accepted OFF Not accepted ON Enable accepted Turns ON when the Reserved station specification enable request accept status SBOO5E is turned ON and the reserved station specification enable processing is completed OFF Not completed ON Completed or error completion Stores the constant link scan status OFF Constant link scan is disabled ON Constant link scan is enabled Conditions e This is enabled when the Data link status own station SB0049 is OFF Stores loopback execution status The loopback station numbers can be checked by Loopback station number 1 SW0070 and Loopback station number 2 SW0071 OFF Normal no loopback stations ON Error lookback being performed Loopback stations exist Condition e This relay is valid while Loopback function setting status SB0078 is on Stores the linkup status of PORT1 own station OFF Linkup in progress ON Linkdown in progress The time that the linkup s
152. ces whose status are to be changed Device Type e Enter a network number for LX LY LB and LSB Set a start number of devices whose status are to be changed Device No HEX Hexadecimal DEC Decimal OCT Octal 2 Clickthe Execute button oi ge S Point Devices that can be changed The only devices that can be changed in this function are ones that have random access capability If a device that is not capable of random access is specified a device type error will occur For details of the random access capability of each device refer to the following manual LT MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual A bit device can also be turned ON and OFF by double clicking the device column of the device information on the monitoring screen Device Monitor Utility 2 Change the device X 0000 to ON All right 138 CHAPTER 12 MONITORING 12 Switching Display Format This section explains a method for switching a display format such as in hexadecimal or in decimal of device information for monitoring Operating procedure 1 OO Data Format gt Word device Bit device gt display format 1 Display format of word device The following are display formats that can be selected for word devices Display format Example DEC decimal 16 bits Www 0000 264 HEX hexadecimal 16 bits iawoooo oos OCT octal 16 bits wbooo ooo410 BIN binary 16 bits fWwwoo00 foo0o 0001 0000 1000
153. ck the Start Test button The result is displayed on Test Result field If the test completes abnormally consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative Hardware test checks the hardware in the CC Link IE Field Network board The following shows a procedure for performing a test Channel No 181 Mode Hi Test Start Test lt Normal completion gt Test Result HP Test was normaly completed lt Abnormal completion gt r Test Result HP Test was abnormaly completed Point O Operation during hardware test 1 Select a board to be tested on the Board Diagnostics screen in CC IE Field Utility Page 142 Section 13 1 Set Mode to H W Test and click the Start Test button The result is displayed on Test Result field If the test completes abnormally consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative Do not access the buffer memory during the hardware test Doing so may cause the test to fail 92 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4 5 4 Self loopback test Self loopback test checks the hardware of the CC Link IE Field Network board alone including the send receive circuit of the transmission system and cables The following shows a procedure for performing a test 1 Connect Ethernet cables to the RJ45 connector PORT1 and RJ45 connector PORT2 of the CC Link IE Field Network board o 2 Select
154. completion status OFF Not executed or execution in progress Loop test completion SB0094 E ON Completed If completed the completion status can be checked by Loop test normal abnormal end SBO095 Stores the loop test normal completion or abnormal completion status OFF Normal completion Loop test normal ON Abnormal completion SB0095 j j abnormal end Conditions e This is enabled when Loop test completion status SB0094 is ON Stores the loop test request accept status OFF Loop test not accepted ON Loop test accepted Loop test request SB009A O accept status oe The master station is turned ON during loop test mode The slave stations are turned ON during the loop test and turned OFF when the loop test is completed Stores the baton pass status for each station OFF All stations normal ON Faulty station found If a faulty station is found the status of each station can be checked by Baton pass status each station SWOOA0 to SWO0A7 SBOOAO Baton pass status Depending on the timing of the link refresh Baton pass status each station each station SWOOAO to SWO0A7 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored sn gS ejey jeloeds yu xipuaddy O Stores the baton pass status for master station OFF Normal Baton pa
155. contents Item Description Monitor Status Display current monitor status Board List Board No Display the board number of each board Channel No Display the channel number of each board Network No Display the network number set for each board Station No Display the station number set for each board Transmission Status Display communication status of each board Latest Error Code Display the latest error code of board Link Refresh Display the maximum minimum and current time of link refresh Board Information Channel No Select a board channel number of a test target or information display target Model Name Display a model name of the selected board Product Information Display product information of the selected board Board Test Execute a test on the selected board 142 CHAPTER 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS Operating procedure 1 Click the Start Monitor button and start monitoring Click the Stop Monitor button to stop monitoring Set a board channel number of a test target or information display target Select a test mode for Mode Click the Start Test button Start the board test A result is displayed in the Test result field Screen button Disgrostis button Displays the CC IE Field Network Diagnostics screen lt gt Page 145 Section 13 2 2 143 peog Buisoubeiq p er 13 2 Diagnosing CC Link IE Field Network This section explains a method for checking
156. creen Page 189 Section 16 7 7 3 Install the board and restart the personal computer e Checking the board installation status Page 186 Section 16 7 2 e Checking on Device Manager screen K Page 188 Section 16 7 6 If any of the above troubleshooting do not solve the error refer to k Page 198 Section 16 8 For the troubleshooting for the specific symptoms refer to 1 in this section UMOP SINUS JO 18 s JOU SBOP JO INdWOD BUOSID E 9O Ayan pue saindwoy jeuosjeg Jo Bunooysajqnol 9 175 16 3 2 Utility does not startup When the utility does not startup check the following items Item Corrective action e Take corrective action following the message Is an error message displayed When the measurement displayed on the screen is not effective gt Page 177 Section 16 3 4 Is the icon of the utility displayed in the menu of REN e The installation is not completed normally Install the software package the operating system p g Sy Page 169 Section 16 2 1 Does the utility start by clicking the icon If any of the above troubleshooting do not solve the error refer to K Page 198 Section 16 8 16 3 3 The screen or operation is abnormal When the screen is not displayed normally or the software cannot be operated normally check the following items Item Corrective action e Take corrective action following the message Is an error message displayed When the measurement displayed on th
157. creen by clicking the trowse button Workspace Project List Select a workspace and a project Workspace Name Enter the name of the workspace to which the unpacked project is saved Project Name Enter the name of the project to which the unpacked project is saved 2 Click the k button The compressed project file is unpacked and saved in the specified folder Screen button e Unpack and open button Unpacks the compressed project file and opens the project 106 CHAPTER 9 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9 5 Deleting Projects This section explains a method for deleting a project saved in a hard disk or other memory media of a personal computer Operating procedure 1 X Project gt Delete The Delete Project screen is displayed 2 Select the project to be deleted 3 Click the Pete button The selected project is deleted Delete Project Save Folder Path L Documents and Settings XP My Documents Workspace2 Browse Workspace Project List a It returns to the workspace list Project coe 9 6 Closing Projects This section explains a method for closing an open project Operating procedure 1 D Project gt Close sjoafo1d Bunajsg S 6 107 9 7 Verifying Project Data This section explains a method for verifying data of an open project and data of another project Use this function to check if the data of the projects are the same or to check the cha
158. ction 8 1 Section 10 2 5 Chapter 12 Section 12 2 1 Section 12 2 3 Section 13 2 2 Chapter 16 Section 16 2 Section 16 7 6 Section 16 7 11 Section 16 9 5 Section 16 10 4 Section 16 11 Appendix 5 Appendix 8 Appendix 9 Appendix 12 Appendix 12 2 Appendix 13 Appendix 13 1 Appendix 13 2 Appendix 14 Appendix 14 3 Section 6 2 2 Section 6 2 3 gt Section 16 2 3 Section 16 2 4 Section 3 3 Section 6 2 1 Section 16 8 Section 16 9 Section 16 9 1 Section 16 10 Appendix 7 Appendix 17 Appendix 18 Section 4 3 4 Section 5 9 Section 6 2 Section 16 1 Section 16 3 Section 16 3 1 Section 16 3 2 Section 16 3 3 Section 16 3 4 Section 16 3 5 Section 16 4 Section 16 4 1 Section 16 4 2 Section 16 4 3 Section 16 4 4 Section 16 5 Section 16 5 1 Section 16 5 2 Section 16 5 3 Section 16 5 4 Section 16 5 5 Section 16 6 Section 16 6 1 Section 16 6 2 Section 16 7 Section 16 9 2 Section 16 9 3 Section 16 10 7 Appendix 11 Appendix 13 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS INTRODUCTION RELATED MANUALS TERMS PACKING LIST Section 2 1 Section 2 5 Section 3 2 Section 4 2 Section 4 3 4 Jan 2014 SH 080980ENG F wages 4 5 4 meter 10 2 2 SSON 13 2 Section ees Chapter Le Section ele Section 16 7 4 Section 16 7 7 Section 16 7 11 Section 16 8 Appendix 7 Appendix 9 Appendix 11 2 Appendix 14 1 Appendix 15 1 Appendix 15 2 Japanese Manual Version SH 080925 G Oct 2013 SH 080980ENG E This manual confers no industrial pr
159. d Diagnostics screen The Board Change screen is displayed Select a board to be diagnosed and click the UE button Change Board Board Selection Board 1 Channel No 181 Network No 1 Master Station Station No O Board 2 Channel No 182 Network No 1 Local Station Station No 1 Cancel 144 CHAPTER 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13 2 2 Displaying diagnostics screen The following explains the diagnostics screen of CC Link IE Field Network Display contents Diagnostics gt CC IE Field Diagnostics Select Diagnostics CC IE Field Diagnostics Desti n ati o n Select Diagnostics Destination E M O n ito r Statu sS Board Board 1 Network No 1 Change Board Select Station Station No 3 Error Ei N t k St t Network Status ai Stop Monitor etwor atus Total Slave Stations Total Slave Stations Number of Station gt Current Link Fl E y Set In Parameter 3 Connected 3 Scan Time 1 ms Errors Detected 2 Hide Disconnected Station Legend Connected St Master 0 Local 1 Branch P1 Es E O Intelligent Disconnected station Network configuration monitor area O p er ati on Te st Eea t E _ Selected Station Communication Status Monitor Q81E S e e cte d S t at on Communication Test eck the transient communication route from the connected o J station to the destination station Station No 3 Enor Y Mode Online Cable Test Check t
160. d in Selected Station Communication Status Monitor gt Page 153 7 in this section e The station status is displayed on the top of Selected Station Communication Status Monitor e If an error occurs a button indicating the error such as Module Error button is displayed Clicking the button allows checking of error details and corrective actions Selected Station Communication Status Monitor Q81BD MAC Address r Click the button to display the Error details screen 3 Various tests and operations can be performed from Operation Test and Information Confirmation Set on the bottom left of the screen 2 gt Page 156 Section 13 2 3 to Page 162 Section 13 2 8 Operation Test Communication Test Check the transient communication route from the connected station to the destination station Cable Test Check the cable status between the connected station and the destination station Link Start Stop Start or stop the network data link Information Confirmation Set Network Event History Access the network the event history log Reserved Station View reserved station numbers and temporarily enable P Enabled reserved stations Enable Disable View station numbers set to ignore errors and temporarily Ignore Station Errors ignore station errors 147 usalos sonsoubelp BulAejdsid ZZ MIOMION PI 4 31 AUINT 90 Buisoubeig ze 1 Select diagnostics target Scree
161. d path 255 mdClose path CC Link IE Field Network board 4 Checking CC Link IE Field Network status on the screen The status of CC Link IE Field Network can be checked using CC IE Field Utility Error locations error causes and event history are displayed on the screen This helps to reduce the time for the system to recover from the error gt Page 142 CHAPTER 13 CC IE Field Diagnostics Select Diagnostics Destination Network Status Total Slave Stations Set In Parameter Connected St Total SI Display error E locations Operation Test Communication Test Cable Test Link Start Stop Information Fanfirmation Set 2 A Dan Station Function Enable Enable Disable Ignore Station Errors Network Event History List Connected Network Event History y Board Board 1 Network No 1 Change Board Select Station Station No 3 Error y Number of Station Errors Detected Current Link Scan Time lave Stations 3 1 ms 2 Local 1 Branch Intelligent 13 Local 3 N Check the transient communication route From the connected station to the destination station Check the cable status between the connected station and the destination station MAC Address Start or stop the network data link ccess the network the event history log View reserved station numbers and temporarily ena
162. d to a slot on the personal computer Set the channel number lt Page 50 Section 4 4 Set the channel number and confirm it with the utility y AG SUA ETE Ks Page 51 Section 4 5 Test the hardware of the installed board y Wire the cables E Page 54 Section 4 6 Wire the network cables for the installed board y AA lt Page 109 CHAPTER 10 Set the parameters and check them with the utility y Check the network I Page 58 Section 4 7 Test the cable connection and data link on the network y Execute a user program Execute a user program or utility uonyelado a 0J9g alnmpasold L Y O 0 UO 0 0O 0O UU 43 4 2 Part Names This section explains each part name of the CC Link IE Field Network board lt Q80BD J71GF11 T2 gt 44 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION Description Reference f Page 45 Section 4 2 Operation LED Indicates the operating status of the CC Link IE Field Network board 1 Indicates the PORT1 connector for connecting to CC Link IE Field Network Page 46 Section 4 2 Indicates the PORT2 connector for connecting to CC Link IE Field Network 2 1 Indicator LED Display the operating status of the CC Link IE Field Network board If an error occurred refer to the troubleshooting and take a corrective action 2 gt Page 192 Section 16 7 11 ERR 5D EUN EL a When the RUN LED is OFF or ON The same LED display as a ne
163. de list lt _ gt Page 199 Section 16 9 16 7 10 Checking operations with tests 1 Board test Check for hardware errors by performing board tests on the Board Diagnostics screen gt Page 142 Section 13 1 Check the hardware related to the bus I F function of the CC Link IE Field Bus I F test Page 51 Section 4 5 1 Network board Memory test Check the memory of the CC Link IE Field Network board Page 52 Section 4 5 2 Hardware test Check the hardware in the CC Link IE Field Network board Page 52 Section 4 5 3 Check the send receive circuit of the transmission system of the CC Link Self loopback test Page 53 Section 4 5 4 IE Field Network board For module test other than boards refer to the manuals of each module 2 Network tests Perform tests on the Board Diagnostics screen lt gt Page 142 Section 13 1 or the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen gt Page 144 Section 13 2 to check for errors in the connection status or settings of the network Item Description Reference Check the network circuit status and parameter setting status of each Loop test Page 58 Section 4 7 1 station Cable test Check the connection status of the Ethernet cable Page 60 Section 4 7 2 Check whether the communication path for transient transmission from ee Page 61 Section 4 7 3 the own station to the target station is correct Communication test 191 SJequunu jeuueyo BuryoeyD 8 9L poyjau Bu
164. der information error in transient data Double communication test data received Incorrect number of stations Communication target station specification error Cable test retry error Hardware error Switch setting error Failed to write to flash ROM MAC address read error Hardware error CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Corrective action e Correct the following settings in the buffer memory start parameter area D81DH Total number of slave stations D81FH Station number range D820H Total number of slave stations D821H Slave station setting information D822H Station type D823H Offset values or points assigned to the devices of each station D824H Setting flag D825H Setting flag application parameter and information setting data e A number of data writes to the flash ROM has exceeded its limit Check the network event history and configure the setting not to generate events consecutively This error code cannot be cleared To clear this error code please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Refer to corrective action for hardware error gt Page 210 1 in this section e Check the data at the station that initiated the online test and retry the test e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e After completion of the communication test retry it e Check the network cond
165. dure when NET Framework 3 5 including NET 2 0 and 3 0 is disabled is the same procedure as MELSOFT products For details of the procedure refer to the technical bulletin FA A 0153 2 Using Windows XP Windows Server 2003 R2 screens Software Installation A The software you are installing has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with this version of Windows Tell me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the software vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing Continue Anyway TOP installation Security Alert Driver Installation x The driver software you are installing for WinDriver has not been properly signed with Authenticode TM technology Therefore Windows cannot tell if the software has been modified since it was published The publisher s identity cannot be verified because of a problem The installed INF file does not contain digital signature information Do you still want to install this driver software More Info Security Alert Driver Installation xj The driver software you are installing for WinDriver has not been properly signed with Authenticode T M technology Therefore Windows cannot tell if the software has bee
166. e MELSECNET H module Connection to the control system Personal computer CC Link IE Field Tracking cable Network board lt Figure 2 When system switching occurs due to standby system error gt CC Link IE Field Network module MELSECNET H module C CC Link IE Field Network D MELSECNET H Connection to the control system Personal computer CC Link IE Field Network board meee E paa m IM mes error Tracking cable CC Link IE Field Network module MELSECNET H module C CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H Standby system Connection to the control system Personal computer CC Link IE Field Network board Tracking cable 216 No SM1600 SD1590 SD1690 Point APPENDIX Path switching is not executed when a communication to the Redundant CPU specified at Logical station No is faulty at communication start A communication error occurs When a communication is faulty refer to gt Page 215 4 b in this section and Page 216 4 c in this section and clear the communication disturbance 14 First communication after execution of the mdOpen function in the MELSEC data link library communications using the mdReceiveEx mdSendEx mdDevRstEx mdDevSetEx mdRand
167. e Pack 2 or later Ultimate Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Enterprise Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Windows Server 2008 Standard Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Windows Server 2008 Enterprise Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Windows Server 2008 Standard x64 Edition Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Windows Server 2008 Enterprise x64 Edition Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard Operating System Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise Operating System Windows 7 Home Premium 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Windows 7 Professional 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Windows 7 Ultimate 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Windows 7 Enterprise 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Windows Server 2012 Standard Operating System Windows 8 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Windows 8 Pro 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Windows 8 Enterprise 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Resolution 1024 x 768 dots or higher 1GB or more CD ROM disk drive CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Item Description Microsoft Visual Studio NET 2003 Visual Basic 9 Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 Visual Basic Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 Visual Basic 3 Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Visual Basic Programming language Microsoft
168. e board to a personal computer which is compliant with PCI standard or PCI Express standard Section 2 5 Operating Environment Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction Securely insert the board into the PCI slot following the board installation instruction of the personal computer Incorrect insertion of the board may cause malfunction failure or drop of the board When installing the board take care not to get injured by an implemented component or a surrounding member When installing the board take care not to contact with other boards Handle the board in a place where static electricity will not be generated Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction The board is included in an antistatic envelope When storing or transporting it be sure to put it in the antistatic envelope Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction Do not drop or apply a strong impact to the board Doing so may cause a failure or malfunction Wiring Precautions NWARNING O Turn off the power for the system in all phases before installing the board or starting wiring Failure to do so may result in electric shock damage to the product or malfunction O After installation of the board and wiring attach the cover on the module before turning it on for operation Failure to do so may result in electric shock NCAUTION O Place the communication cable connected to the board in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cables m
169. e compliance manufactures must issue an EC Declaration of Conformity and the products must bear a CE marking 1 Sales representative in EU member states The authorized representative in EU member states will be Company name Mitsubishi Electric Europe BV Address Gothaer Strasse 8 40880 Ratingen Germany Appendix 14 1 Measures to comply with the EMC Directive The EMC Directive sets two requirements for compliance emission conducted and radiated electromagnetic energy emitted by a product and immunity the ability of a product to not be influenced by externally generated electromagnetic energy This section summarizes the precautions for machinery constructed with the CC Link IE Field Network board to comply with the EMC Directive These precautions are based on the requirements of the EMC Directive and the harmonized standards However they do not guarantee that the entire machinery constructed according to the descriptions complies with the EMC Directive The manufacture of the machinery must determine the testing method for compliance and declare conformity to the EMC Directive 1 EMC Directive related standards a Emission requirements Standard Test description Value specified in standard EN61131 2 2007 zq 2 274 e 30 to 230MHz QP 40dBuV m measured at 10m distance e 230 to 1000MHz QP 47dBuV m measured at 10m distance 0 15 to 0 5MHz QP 79dB The noise level which the product Mean 66dB 2 emits
170. e connected between PORT 1s and between PORT1 and PORT2 ib LER LER LINK LINK LER LER P2 Il P2 LINK LINK LINK QJ71GF11 T QJ71GF11 T QJ71GF11 T2 QJ71GF11 T2 06 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 2 Disconnecting the cable 1 Power off the system 2 Press the latch down and unplug the Ethernet cable BULIM 9 p uol o uuo aqe9 jaulaul3 ZW OY Of 4 7 08 Tests After Wiring This section describes loop and cable tests that should be performed after network wiring Perform these tests to the actual operating network configuration 4 7 1 Loop test The loop test checks each station s network line and parameter setting status to verify whether the network is operating correctly The test allows checking the following items Item Master station duplication check Station number duplication check Out of range station No check Reserved station specification check Consistency check of the n
171. e eee eee 132 DENINIKAEEDD seo ie situa edad at Se aid ta 194 R data link faulty Stati0N T1 SSS Device Monitor Utility 128 A ee aoc edad cee r ot a aa 64 Driver WDT function a anaana o o 86 ratno plates anaa aa a aia 260 Driver WDT Monitoring Time 119 Remote input RX a oa naana aeaaea 218 Remote output RY o o oooooo 218 E Remote register RWH 219 Remote register RWW 219 o is ithe icles athe we alee a ee 199 Reserved station 2 eee eee eee 82 Error invalid station o ooooo o o o 83 Ring topology sses eee ee eee eee 26 a tata andadas 84 Routing parameters 2 00005 74 121 External Dimensions o oooooo o 278 RWiiocccccccc o 112 219 EVV ba ida e Se ah obs a ial ad ai idas 112 219 A ae 112 218 F aia 112 218 Function version atada a 260 S H Screw tightening torque lt o 48 SE Ma A A ae arse 260 ee AOS 190134 Slave statio bro ads as a Rates aa a 21 64 Star topology iii a eek 26 L LEN ia Dia 195 T ae Stocco te gh ee Pam ee ce ss ts Transient transmissi0N o ooo 73 ine topology oaaae 26 A iaaii nm Erea a AT 40 a A OMNES E E EE E E E ETES 39 U Link refresh oh dos goa an tated aoe ee onde da 65 254 m link scan se aeua daaa aa eed aa ba 65 254 Utility sat aaa aes Shi Aah arao i call SO ye TE a Wi aa Roar Wo ae Aa 88 91 Link special r
172. e formula below e Offset buffer memory address 19968 station number 1 x 2 e Size buffer memory address 19969 station number 1 x 2 4 RWr offset size information Address 20224 to 20225 4F00H to 4FEFH The areas to store the RWr start number and number of points for each station number Buffer memory addresses 20224 4F00H Station No 1 Offset 20225 4F01H Station No 1 Size in units of words 20226 4F02H Station No 2 Offset 20227 4F03H Station No 2 Size in units of words 20462 4FEEH Station No 120 Offset 20463 4FEFH Station No 120 Size in units of words The offset and size buffer memory address for each station number can be calculated using the formula below e Offset buffer memory address 20224 station number 1 x 2 e Size buffer memory address 20225 station number 1 x 2 UOIJEWIOJUI OZIS JOSHO ZZ XIpuaddy sessalppy JOWIN yng JO sjielaq Zz XIpuaddy 221 Appendix 2 3 Own station information The areas to store the own station s information on the network 1 Own station network card information Address 20512 to 20515 5020H to 5023H Address Decimal Hexadecimal Name Description 20512 5020H Manufacturer code 20513 5021H Model type The own station s board information is stored 20514 5022H Model code 20515 60255 2 Own station controller information Address 20520 to 20536 5028H to 5038H Address Decimal Hexadecimal Descriptio
173. e hein rd 103 11 9 4 Saving Projects with Compression and Unpacking Projects lt lt o o o 105 95 Deleting Project END A oe EOE ES abe o c pcan MS ae a 107 96 ClOSINO ProjeciS aa aria ede arder add ica nee we 107 9 Vening Project Data vos A A is ee ee 108 CHAPTER 10 SETTING PARAMETERS 109 1077 Parametern same ot das rre dana ea la labo ad Ree ad 109 10 2 Setting Network Parameter o o o oooo eee eee nee ees 110 10 2 1 Network type and Mode o 111 10 2 2 Network configuration setting 0 0 00 teen eee eens 112 10 2 3 Network operation setting viril bs towns ddan ted otey albu ela 116 10 2 4 Event setting 0 0 ccc cc eee 117 10 25 Driver Seino cai sa eine Kener DS om ke eae 119 10 20 Target Settings cana A emer eee a Pewee 120 10 2 7 Routing parameters 121 CHAPTER 11 OPERATING BOARD ONLINE 124 11 1 Setting Board Channel Numbers 0 0 00 0 ccc eee eens 124 11 2 Writing Reading Parameters to from Board 000 ccc eee 125 11 3 Verifying Parameters of Board and Project 0 0 126 TLA RESCHING DOAN acne AOR eee Sheed Ea eee ee eas eles da kee eats 127 CHAPTER 12 MONITORING 128 12 1 Overview of Device Monitor Utility 0 2 0 0 00 anaana eee 128 12 2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations of Device Monitor Utility 130 12 21 Stare and Completion ciar AA dia 130 12 2 2 Screen configuration and basic operations
174. e number of resends at the request source of the dedicated instruction and retry the operation e When the own station or target station has detected an error identify the cause of the error and take action Number of resends error e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation dedicated instruction e When the mode of the master station is Online High Speed Mode change it to Online Normal Mode and retry the operation e Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected properly e Correct the network number at the request source of the dedicated instruction Target network No error and retry the operation dedicated instruction e If the request source resides in another network check if the routing parameters are correctly set and take corrective action Incorrect channel used for the e For the SEND instruction set 1 or 2 for the target channel No in the control data dedicated instruction e For the REMFR REMTO instruction set any of 1 to 32 for the channel No e An invalid value is set for the control block of the dedicated instruction Correct the value and then retry the operation Dedicated instruction error ae e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Set the station number in Network Parameter and retry the operation Own station No unde
175. e past Force the system to restart data link Data link start stop instructing e Link start was instructed during execution of data link Instruct link start after station error instruction of link stop History acquisition setting data e The area space for writing history acquisition setting data in Network Event History full is insufficient Reset the CPU module or turn OFF the power and then ON Hardware error e Refer to corrective action for hardware error gt Page 210 1 in this section History acquisition setting data e The previous history acquisition setting data in Network Event History were not error written successfully Reset the CPU module or turn OFF the power and then ON e The read request in CC Link IE Field Network Diagnostics is incorrect Close the Transient data request error CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics dialog box and request it again e Check the read request data at the request source station and retry the operation e A number of data writes to the flash ROM has exceeded its limit Replace a Flash ROM failure master local module and board The flash ROM may be failed Perform hardware and self loopback tests gt Page 52 Section 4 5 3 Page 53 Section 4 5 4 Flash ROM failure Hardware error e Refer to corrective action for hardware error lt gt Page 210 1 in this section e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation e Check if the
176. e screen is not effective gt Page 177 Section 16 3 4 e Check if the display setting is correct with Device Manager and install the appropriate display driver Is the display setting correct e Perform Windows Update e Change the hardware acceleration setting in the display setting Are other applications being executed e Close the screens of all other applications e Check the operating environment Page 187 Section 16 7 4 Is there any error on the personal computer e Check the personal computer and operating system E Page 187 Section 16 7 5 If any of the above troubleshooting do not solve the error refer to K Page 198 Section 16 8 176 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 3 4 Corrective action displayed on the screen is not effective When an unexpected screen is displayed or the corrective action displayed on the screen is not effective check the following items The following table shows the corrective actions when the screen is displayed Item User Account Control screen User Account Control z Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it before E S Setup exe Unidentified Publisher gt Cancel I don t know where this program is from or what it s for gt Allow I trust this program I know where it s from or I ve used it before v Details User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer Ay User Account Contr
177. e station is disconnected Master station Station in Offline mode No loopback is No loopback is detected detected To detect loopback set the offline mode station as a reserved station When the offline mode station is disconnected loopback can be detected 29 d Connecting disconnecting a cable and turning off on a device When the following operations are performed all stations on the network may be reconnected Then data link error may momentarily occur in all the stations and outputs of the connected slave stations may turn off Network Configuration Operations e Turning off on a system on a slave station or the switching hub Star topology e Connecting disconnecting an Ethernet cable connected to the switching hub e Disconnecting an Ethernet cable from a slave station and connecting it to another slave station or the switching hub e Simultaneously turning off on systems on multiple stations Line topology ring topology e Simultaneously connecting disconnecting Ethernet cables to from multiple stations When a data link error station returns a data link error will occur in all the stations Instantaneous error on all stations si si onssas t id aansen mo E EEE BEBSSS ION AN IA NNB ANDAN Insertion removal or turning OFF ON For a measure to above error set the network operation setting to maintain inputs from data link error station when outputs need to be mai
178. earance between the control panel and its door reduce the clearance as much as possible Use of EMI gaskets sealing the clearance can suppress undesired radiated emissions The tests by Mitsubishi were conducted using a control panel having the damping characteristics of 37dB maximum and 30dB average measured at 3m distance 30 to 300MHZ b Wiring power and ground cables e Provide a ground point to the control panel near the power supply module Ground the LG and FG terminals of the power supply module to the ground point with the thickest and shortest ground cable possible 30cm or shorter 3 Cables Use a shielded cable for the cable extended out of the control panel If a shielded cable is not used or not grounded correctly the noise immunity will not meet the required value a CC Link IE Field Network cables The precautions for using CC Link IE Field Network cables are described below e Use CC Link IE Field Network cables SC E5EW SL M manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System Service Co Ltd e A CC Link IE Field Network cable is a shielded cable Remove a part of the shield as shown below and ground the largest possible exposed section to the ground CC Link IE Field Network cable Shield 2 6 APPENDIX b Grounding cables with a cable clamp Ground the shield of the external wiring cable to the control panel with the AD75CK cable clamp Mitsubishi Ground the shield within 20 to 30cm from the module
179. ed on the following pages Point e Do not write any data to an area whose number is not on the link special register SW list Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system APPENDIX Availability Number Description Master Local station station Sets the station where cyclic transmission is stopped or started OOH Own station 01H All stations 02H Specified station SWO000 80H Own station Forced link start 81H All stations Forced link start 82H Specified station Forced link start Stopping starting of cyclic transmission is performed by System link start SB0002 or System link stop SB0003 When setting 02H or 82H by the Link stop start direction SW0000 this sets the station number that stops or starts cyclic transmission Link stop start direction 0 No direction issued for stop or start 1 Direction issued for stop or start b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 area swooor 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 swo00s swoo0s 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 swoo06 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 e swoo04 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 Swoo07 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 1021101 100 99 98 97 swooos hojere Each number in the table represents station No Specify the monito
180. egister SW 219 Link special relay SB 219 LOCal Station sema od So rd 111 280 V V CISION aras crore Sic ae seni Ww ane 100 132 281 REVISIONS The manual number is written at the bottom left of the back cover Print date May 2011 SH 080980ENG A First edition Addition Appendix 13 Appendix 14 Mar 2012 SH 080980ENG B Section 2 5 Section 7 1 1 Section 7 1 3 Section 7 2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS RELATED MANUALS HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL TERMS Section 2 5 Section 3 1 Section 3 2 Section 3 3 Section 4 2 1 Section 4 2 2 Section 4 6 1 Section 4 6 2 Section 5 3 1 Section 6 1 Section 6 1 1 Section 6 1 2 Apr 2012 SH 080980ENG C Section 6 1 3 Section 8 1 Section 10 2 7 Section 12 1 Section 12 5 Section 12 6 1 Section 12 6 2 Chapter 14 Chapter 14 1 Section 16 5 Appendix 3 Appendix 9 Appendix 11 1 Appendix 12 1 Chapter 4 gt Appendix 12 Chapter 5 to Chapter 17 gt Chapter 4 to Chapter 16 Appendix 12 to Appendix14 gt Appendix 13 to Appendix 15 Correction Dec 2012 SH 080980ENG D HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL TERMS Section 2 5 Section 4 2 1 Section 13 2 2 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE TERMS Section 1 1 Section 1 2 Section 2 2 Section 2 3 Section 2 5 Section 3 1 Section 3 2 Section 4 1 Section 4 2 Section 4 3 Section 4 3 1 Section 5 1 Section 5 2 1 Section 5 2 4 Section 5 2 5 Section 5 4 Section 5 5 Section 5 6 Section 6 1 Section 6 2 Section 6 3 Se
181. ely even when a fault occurs in a personal computer Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction 1 Emergency stop circuits protection circuits and protective interlock circuits for conflicting operations such as forward reverse rotations or upper lower limit positioning must be configured external to the programmable controller 2 The station to which the board is installed may be disconnected from the data link due to a data link error If this occurs the data output from the station and written to other stations before the error will be held until the station is reconnected to the network until its data link is restarted Provide a mechanism for data link status monitoring and error handling for each station that is connected to the data link system O For the operating status of each station after a communication failure refer to this manual Incorrect output or malfunction due to a communication failure may result in an accident O When changing data during operation configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely Configure an interlock circuit in the program and determine corrective actions to be taken between the personal computer and CPU module in case of a communication failure CAUTION O Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm or m
182. em Description Set a type of devices whose values are to be changed e Enter a block number for ER s njea ao1nap plom HuibueuyD 192 sanj eA Juano BuibueyO 931 Device Type Enter a network number for LW and LSW e Enter a value of start I O number divided by 16 in decimal for SPG Set a start number of devices whose values are to be changed Device No HEX Hexadecimal DEC Decimal OCT Octal 2 Seta value and points to be changed Item Description Set a value to be changed Setting Data i HEX Hexadecimal DEC Decimal 3 For the Continuous Changing in Data function set device points to be changed Item Description Set a number of devices whose values are to be changed Points HEX Hexadecimal DEC Decimal OCT Octal Setting range 1 to 64 points 4 Click the Execute button 137 A data of a word device can also be changed by double clicking the device column of the device information on the monitoring screen Aw 0001 0 Data Changing Aw 0002 0 Device Ww 0002 CHEX Dec fo Click 12 6 2 Turning bit devices ON and OFF Change ONs and OFFs of bit devices Screen display O Device Write gt Bit Device Set Bit Device Reset Device Type Device Type x direct link input Network No 1 DeviceNo HEX CDEC ocT 0000 FP Operating procedure 1 Setthe type and number of devices whose current status are to be changed Item Description Set a type of devi
183. ere cyclic transmission of bit by bit input output signals and word by word input output data is performed with the master station Transient transmission can be also performed The station returns a response to transient transmission request from other stations The station also issues transient transmission request to other stations Station that handles bit and word data It can communicate with the master and local stations only and not with other remote I O stations remote device stations or intelligent device stations Both cyclic and transient transmissions are available Generic term for the stations other than the master station local station remote l O station remote device station and intelligent device station Station that is not actually connected but must be included in the total number of the stations on the network since it is to be connected in the future Station that comprises of a programmable controller and multiple network modules and that relays data link communication to another network A communication function by which data are periodically exchanged among stations on the same network by using link devices RX RY RWw and RWr A method for communication with another station which is used when requested by a dedicated instruction or utility Generic term for cyclic transmission and transient transmission Process of selecting paths for communication with other networks For CC Link IE Field Network to co
184. ertion of the board may lead to a malfunction failure or drop of the board e When installing the board care should be taken not to get injured by an implemented component or a surrounding member e When installing the board care should be taken not to contact with other boards 49 4 4 Setting Channel Numbers 90 Channel number is set per board and used to identify the board 181 is set for the board channel number as a factory default and the range of 181 to 184 can be set Channel numbers being set are used to specify the target boards in setting parameters and performing the MELSEC data link library function When using two or more boards in a single personal computer set channel numbers not to overlap 1 Setting method Set the channel numbers on the Channel No Setting screen in CC IE Field Utility Page 124 Section 11 1 Point Channel numbers set on the Channel No Setting is saved to the board The channel numbers being set are retained when performing the following operations e Rebooting a personal computer Board installation position change e Board replacement to another personal computer 4 5 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION Tests Before Wiring Standalone Tests of the Board This section explains the CC Link IE Field Network board tests before network wiring Point O Ethernet cable Do not connect an Ethernet cable to the CC Link IE Field Network board in testing a board alone Do
185. es Intel Core 2 Duo is registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and or its affiliates All other company names and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies 284 CC Link IE Field Network Interface Board User s Manual For SW1DNC CCIEF B SW1 CCIEF B U E 13 258 SH NA 080980ENG F 1401 KWIX a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
186. essed to CPU module other than QCPU K Page 181 Section 16 5 2 e Communication cannot be performed occasionally when executing user program E Page 181 Section 16 5 3 e Station is disconnected K Page 181 Section 16 5 4 16 5 1 Communication error ERR LED is ON Flashing When the ERR LED is ON flashing due to the communication error check the following items 1 ERR LED is ON One of the following error occurred e An all station error is detected e Stations with same station number exist on the network e The network parameter is corrupted e The network parameter does not match the installation status Reserved station specification number of connected stations network number etc Check the following items Item Corrective action Is the network parameter set according to the actual board j E Check the parameter settings Page 110 Section 10 2 installation status Is the board error occurred e Perform the board test Page 191 Section 16 7 9 e Perform the board standalone test L Page 191 Section 16 7 10 1 Does the hardware of the board operate properly If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to K Page 198 Section 16 8 2 ERR LED is flashing The error station is detected Check the following items Item Corrective action Is a disconnected station displayed in the network configuration E Page 145 Section 13 2 2 of the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Perform a tr
187. esuj 9 6 2 Installation The following explains a procedure for installing the software package 1 Installation 1 Insert the CD ROM to the CD ROM drive 2 Double click the Setup exe file on the CD ROM 3 By following the on screen instructions select or enter the necessary information When the corrective action displayed on the screen is not effective L Page 170 Section 16 2 3 4 Restart the perdonal computer 2 When installation is completed normally When the installation is completed normally the following utilities are registered a Utility When the installation is completed normally the utilities shown below are registered in the Start of Windows 1 Start All App or Start All programs Folder Utility name Description MELSEC A m l l CC IE Field Utility Utility to setting board and displaying status CC IE Field Board m Utility to monitoring devices and changing the MELSEC Device Monitor Utility device value b MELSEC Data Link Library MELSEC data link library is used for the following software packages in common When the utilities are installed on the same personal computer the newer MELSEC data link library of the software package is enabled When the installation is completed normally the manual of MELSEC data link library is registered in the MELSEC folder as the same folder as the utility Point e In order to view the manuals Adobe Reader i
188. et cable A 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet is used for the connection interface The wiring cost can be reduced because 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet cables are commercially available lt gt Page 33 Section 2 4 1 1000BASE T 4 Flexible wiring for the system arrangements The network can be wired into star topology line topology and ring topology L gt Page 26 Section 2 2 2 For star topology a 1000BASE T design switching hub can be used 2 gt Page 33 Section 2 4 2 Wiring is highly flexible because a network can consist of a combination of star and line topologies For example the control panels can be connected through a star topology and the production lines through a line topology Star topology CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1 2 CC Link IE Field Network Board CC Link IE Field Network board allows the connection of a personal computer to CC Link IE Field Network CC Link IE Field Network board can be used as either a master station or local stations of CC Link IE Field Network 1 A personal computer can be easily connected to CC Link IE Field Network A system which contains a personal computer as a master station or local stations of the CC Link IE Field Network system can be configured CC Link IE Field Network 2 System controls and high speed data collection For a reduction of takt time in a manufacturing system control data logging data of manufacturing processes management d
189. et cable connected to the PORT1 or PORT2 of the target station is tested For the whole network status check the loop test lt 7 Page 58 Section 4 7 1 1 Start Utility on the computer where CC Link IE Field Network board is installed 2 The Cable test screen is displayed Cable Test Testing Station Setting O Select Diagnostics gt CC IE Field Diagnostics Network No 1 Station No 2 O gt Cable Test button y ae Testing cable status between testing station and equipment connected to testing station port 3 E nte ra stati on hum be ran d cl IC k th e b utto n RE ee so that the test can be operated When an error tals Test Resut occurs take actions according to the error Normal Cable disconnected unconnected Error Factor Error Factor m es S ag e Cable between this PORT and connected equipment is disconnected or cable is not connected to PORT Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Please check if cable is connected to PORT Please check if cable to connected equipment is not disconnected Close 4 7 3 Communication test CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION Communication test checks if transient transmission data can be properly routed from the own station to the communication target Take the following system configuration as an example of communication test procedure CC Link IE Field Network 4 BES y Own station request source Station
190. f the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected properly e If the request source resides in another network check if the routing parameters are correctly set and take corrective action e Correct the transient data at the request source and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING D249H D24AH D24BH D24CH D24DH D24EH D24FH D250H D251H D252H e Correct the target station s CPU type at the request source of the dedicated Target station s CPU type error instruction and retry the operation dedicated instruction e If the request source resides in another network check if the routing parameters are correctly set and take corrective action e Correct the arrival monitoring time at the request source of the dedicated instruction and retry the operation e When the own station or target station has detected an error identify the cause of the error and take action Arrival monitoring time error dedicated instruction e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation e When the mode of the master station is Online High Speed Mode change it to Online Normal Mode and retry the operation e Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected properly e Correct th
191. fined 4 p e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or dedicated instruction SI BPOD 10113 691 representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e The flash ROM may be faulty Flash ROM failure Refer to corrective action for hardware error Page 210 1 in this section e Correct the number of resends at the request source of the dedicated instruction and retry the operation e When the own station or target station has detected an error identify the cause of the error and take action Arrival confirmation error o e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation e When the mode of the master station is Online High Speed Mode change it to Online Normal Mode and retry the operation dedicated instruction e Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected properly e Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and take action e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation e When the mode of the master station is Online High Speed Mode change it to Online Normal Mode and retry the operation Transmission completion wait timeout dedicated instruction e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 203 D253H D254H D
192. g of the master local module e Correct the request command at the request source and retry the operation e Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and take action e When the receiving station encountered overloading of transient data send the data from the source after a give time has elapsed e Temporarily stop the transient transmission and then retry the operation e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation e Using the COM instruction increase the processing frequency of transient transmission e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and take action e Exchange the cables between PORT1 and PORT 2 of the request source and retry the operation e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation 205 SI BPOD 10113 691 Error code D2A0H D2A1H D2A2H D2A3H to D2ADH D2AEH D2AFH D2B0H D602H to D609H D60AH D60DH to D610H D611H to D618H D619H to D61AH 206 Receive buffer full Send buffer full Transmission completion wait timer timeout Error in transient data Target station No error in transient data Target station No error in transient data Transient transmission failed Parameter error Par
193. g system always shut down the computer e The behavior of the board and the personal computer when the personal computer enters the power save mode differs according to the operating system For details of error codes and messages when the power save mode set by a user or a program is entered refer to the following appendix Page 274 Appendix 14 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 3 Instructions for user program a Supported version of SW1DNC CCIEF B User program Supported version 32 bit version user program All versions 64 bit version user program 7 Version 1 02C or later 1 Programs can be created and executed on the 64 bit version operating system 2 Programs can be created on the 32 bit version operating system however the following screen appears and cannot be executed lt When using Windows XP 32 bit version gt C MELSEC WTEST exe lt When using Windows 7 32 bit version gt C MELSEC MTEST exe Q The version of this file is not compatible with the version of Windows you re running Check your computer s system information to see whether you need an x86 32 bit or x64 64 bit version of the program and then contact the software publisher b Language environment e User programs created in the Japanese environment work only in the Japanese environment e User programs created in the English environment work only in the English environment c MELSEC data link library F
194. gs of power button action in shutdown Do you continue the installation 3 Program Compatibility Assistant This program might not have installed correctly If this program didn t install correctly try reinstalling using settings that are compatible with this version of Windows m Program Setup Launcher r Publisher InstallShield Software Corporation Location E EnvMEL EnvMELENG SETUP EXE Reinstall using recommended settings This program installed correctly Cancel What settings are applied KI Windows Security A Windows can t verify the publisher of this driver software 3 Don t install this driver software You should check your manufacturer s website for updated driver software for your device Install this driver software anyway Only install driver software obtained from your manufacturer s website or disc Unsigned software from other sources may harm your computer or steal information A wv See details procedure This screen is displayed when user account control is enabled Click Allow or the Yes button Click the Yes button MELSECPowerManager is installed and the Windows Power Options settings are changed automatically For details of MELSECPowerManager refer to the following appendix gt Page 271 Appendix 13 If this screen is displayed during the installation or at the installation completion click This program ins
195. h function Display the current device status For changing the monitoring method refer to the following section Device information 2 Page 133 Section 12 3 For changing the current values refer to the following section Page 137 Section 12 6 Display the currently set network status Network status For setting the network refer to the following section Page 135 Section 12 4 Display the type and display format of devices being displayed For changing a device type refer to the following section Display method gt Page 136 Section 12 5 For changing a display format refer to the following section L gt Page 139 Section 12 7 Point O When own station is set as a monitoring target 0 is displayed for the network number and 255 is displayed for the station number as a network status 131 suoneJado diseq pue uoneIn uoo usalos ZZZ YINN JOJYUOJA a912q JO suoneJsado dseg pue uonen yuon Uealos ZZ 12 2 3 Help function 1 Displaying Help screen Display the Help screen of Device Monitor Utility Operating procedure 1 DHelp gt Manual 2 Checking product version Display information such as a software version of Device Monitor Utility Operating procedure 1 DHelp gt Version Device Monitor Utility Device Monitor Utility 2010 08 09 Copyright C 2001 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION All Rights Reserved 132 CHAPTER 12 MONITORING 12 3 Selecting Monitoring Me
196. he CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics 2 gt Page 145 Section 13 2 2 L ERR LED is turned OFF automatically when a normal data is received or the loopback function is not performed in a ring topology Check Corrective action e Check the cables and wiring gt Page 186 Section 16 7 3 e Perform a cable test Page 60 Section 4 7 2 Is the connected other station normal Check if the other station s power is turned ON Are cables and wiring normal Change the mode of the master station to the online mode lt gt Page 110 Section 10 2 Is the mode of the master station set to the online mode Is the installation environment within the specifications l l l e Check the installation environment _ gt Page 186 Section 16 7 1 Is there any noise influence When the loopback function is enabled check if the ring topology is Is the loopback function enabled for the master station correctly configured for the port where the L ERR LED is on 237 Page 28 Section 2 2 3 b Is the board hardware operating normally Perform the board test L gt Page 191 Section 16 7 10 1 4 LINK LED is turned OFF This indicates a status in which the board can not communicate link down Check Corrective action a N N 7 e Check the cables and wiring L gt Page 186 Section 16 7 3 20 Are cables and wiring normal gt Perform a cable test Page 60 Section 4 7 2 O 3 O s
197. he cable status between the connected station and Co m m u n cati O n ats the destination station MAC Address Limk Start Stop m Start or stop the network data link Module Error S tat u S M O n l to r n fo rm ati on Information Confirmation Set Network Event History Access the network the event history log Confirmation Set Resayved Station View reserved station numbers and temporarily enable Function Enable reserved stations Enable Disable View station numbers set to ignore errors and temporarily Ignore Station Errors ignore station errors Display contents O Diagnosed A Diagnosed with restrictions x Not diagnosed Diagnostics target Item Restrictions Reference Master Local station station Select Diagnostics Destination O Page 148 1 in this section Network Status network configuration Legends Display of network configuration and usalos sonsouBelp BulAejdsig ZZE WIOMION PI 4 31 AUNT 90 Buisoubeig ze error status Page 149 3 in this section Page 149 4 in this section Display of disconnected cable and o l Page 150 5 in this section disconnected station o Page 153 6 in this section Display of selected station status and o l Page 153 7 in this section error details Slave station number setting Only for slave stations whose number has not been set Operation Test For a local station this function can Link Start Stop only
198. he count stores only error data that is not transmitted to all stations When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned ON the stored count is cleared Conditions e This is enabled when the Mode status SW0043 is 0 or 1 during online Stores the cumulative count that error data was received at the PORT1 When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned ON the stored count is cleared Conditions Stores the count of the network event history This stored count is cleared when Event count clear SB0009 is turned ON Stores the cumulative count that was detected for cable disconnections at the PORT2 When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned ON the stored count is cleared Stores the cumulative count that error data was received at the PORT2 The count stores only error data that is not transmitted to all stations When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned ON the stored count is cleared Conditions e This is enabled when the Mode status SW0043 is 0 or 1 during online Stores the cumulative count that error data was received at the PORT2 When Clear communication error count SBO006 is turned ON the stored count is cleared Conditions e This is enabled when the Mode status SW0043 is 0 or 1 during online O e This is enabled when the Mode status SW0043 is 0 or 1 during online o APPENDIX Availability Number Desc
199. he target station at the station that sent the SEND instruction e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Check the target station number and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Check the execution abnormal end type and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Check the request type in the request data and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Check the target station number and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Change the mode of the master station from Loop test to Online and execute it again e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Retry it after a little while e Change the channel for the own or target station e Change the channel for the own or target station e An invalid value is set fo
200. hen accessing mutually between the own station and another station Change the channel used for the own station for each sending and receiving of data Station No 0 Station No 1 Own station Other station Channel 1 For send SEND Channel 1 Channel 1 RECV Channel 1 For receive Channel 2 For receive RECV Channel 2 Channel 2 SEND Channel 2 For send 76 CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS 2 SEND function The SEND function sends data from the own station to the specified channel of the specified station using the mdSend mdSendEx function of MELSEC data link library function Own station Target station User application Target station CPU module main Channel Channel 1 mdOpen 181 1 amp path anne an Channel 2 Channel 2 mdSendEx path 1 1 a SEND function mdClose path Point O Sending data to the same channel of the target station Send the data after the target station has been read the specified channel data An error will be occurred if sending the data to the same channel of the target station before reading the specified channel data Own station Target station User application Target station CPU module main Channel 1 cl Channel 1 mdOpen 181 1 amp path oy mdSendEx path 1 1 Channel 2 mdSendEx path 1 1 gt Channel 2 Channel 2 mdClose path RECV When the multiple network modules are mounted on the target station Specify the stati
201. ic electrical power distribution network and the machinery within premises Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities The surge voltage withstand level for up to the rated voltage of 300V is 2500V 3 This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in terms of the environment in which the equipment is used Pollution degree 2 is when only non conductive pollution occurs A temporary conductivity caused by condensing must be expected occasionally The general specifications both CC Link IE Field Network board and a personal computer must be satisfied after installation 38 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 2 Performance Specifications Performance specifications of the CC Link IE Field Network board are shown below Item Specification 16384 points 2KB 16384 points 2KB 8192 points 16KB 8192 points 16KB 16384 points 2KB 16384 points 2KB PRY Master station 8192 points 16KB Maximum link points per network Maximum link points per 8192 points 16KB station 2048 points 256 bytes 2048 points 256 bytes Local station 9 1024points 2048 bytes 1024 points 2048 bytes 2 Communication speed 1Gbps An Ethernet cable that meets the 1000BASE T standard Category 5e or higher double shielded STP straight cable lt gt Page 33 Section 2 4 1 100m max Compliant with ANSI TIA EIA 568 B Category 5e L gt Page 54 Section 4 6 1
202. icated instruction e Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected properly D212H Transient transmission failed e Exchange the cables between PORT1 and PORT 2 of the request source and retry the operation e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation D213H e Correct the request command at the request source and retry the operation D214H e Correct the data length at the request source and retry the operation D215H e Change the mode to Online and retry the operation D216H to D217H e Correct the request command at the request source and retry the operation e At the request source correct the number of the data to be read from or written to D218H Transient data request error the device and retry the operation D219H Transient data request error e Correct the attribute code at the request source and retry the operation D21AH Transient data request error e Correct the access code at the request source and retry the operation Abnormal transient data were issued from the CPU module SI BPOD 10113 691 e Replace the CPU module and retry the operation D21BH to D21CH Transient data request error i T e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e A cable test cannot be applied to a network of a different network number Correct the data in Testing Sta
203. ice List Point O Devices that can be monitored with 16 point register monitor The only devices that can be monitored using the 16 point register monitor are ones that have random access capability If a device that is not capable of random access is specified a device type error will occur For details of the random access capability of each device refer to the following manual MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 136 CHAPTER 12 MONITORING 12 6 Changing Current Values This section explains a method for changing current device values Point O Precaution When changing data during an operation configure interlock circuits in a program to ensure the safe system operation Countermeasures against data communication errors should be arranged between a personal computer and a CPU module as a system 12 6 1 Changing word device values Change word device values The Continuous Change in Data function changes the values of continuous word devices to the same value Screen display W Device Write gt Data Changing Continuous Change in Data lt For Data Changing gt lt For Continuous Change in Data gt Device Type Device Type Device Type Ertextension file register y Device Type sPa special direct buffer register v Block No Start I O No 16 DEC DeviceNo Operating procedure 1 Setthe type and number of devices whose current values are to be changed It
204. ics screen gt Erin ene button Reserved Station Function Enable Temporarily enable reserved stations Reserved stations can not be enabled from local stations if the selected station is a local station sub master station sub master operation It is only possible to view the list of reserved stations Enabled reserved stations will remain active until the master station sub master station master operation is turned OFF or reset At that time all reserved stations will be restored according to the parameters in the master station Reserved Station List f Hua Legend Operation Method 15 Reserved Station 15 Reserved Station Reserved Station No Setting 15 Unassigned station number Function Disable Not Selectable Not selectable Operation Method t 1 Set a station to reserved station errors by clicking the appropriate station number box 2 Click the apply OK button to reflect the changes EEN Reserved Station Es Station To Enable Reserved To Disable Station Function i Cancel Operating procedure 1 Select reserved stations to be canceled temporarily or reserved again from Reserved Station List 2 Click the button The selected reserved stations are canceled temporarily or reserved again When the process is completed the contents of Reserved Station List are updated Point Parameter setting The network parameter does not reflect the temporary cancellation of
205. ied as station setting reserved e Change the station number of the own station to a station number that is not reserved e Change the station number so that it will not be duplicated with any other station DOE Station No duplication own number station e After taking the above action power off and then on all the stations that detected the station number duplication error or reset them e Add information of the own station to Network Configuration Setting of the DOE3H Own station No out of range master station e Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and take E action Multiple master stations o DOE4H e Check if the cables and switching hub are connected properly including own station l l e After taking the above action power OFF and then ON all the stations that detected this error or reset them DOFOH to D113H e Refer to corrective action for hardware error lt gt Page 210 1 in this section e Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and take action D200H Double transient data received e Check if the cables and switching hub are connected properly e If the request source resides in another network check if the routing parameters are correctly set and take corrective action Header information error in D201H e Correct the header information at the request source and retry the operation transient data e Reduce the frequency of transie
206. in CC IE Field Utility Screen display Tab Tool hint Scroll button ae Ei Network Parameter CC IE Fi X Sh Network Parameter CC IE Field Net Network Parameter CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting Work window Port ord Boada Board 4 de mares CCIE Feld ater taton foro e en Swng SULON channel wf tao A es A aa AAA A station a EE E Mode Onlime MormalMode ro y y E remarkcontiguratien sereng gt gt gt Po Network Operation setting AAA po E E d SSS Driver Setting ee O _ Sa Target Setting AAA Necessary Settina No Setting Already Set Set if itis needed No Setting Already Set Routing Parameters Check End Cancel Display contents Item Description Become active when selected The tab order can be changed by dragging and dropping tabs The window s can be closed from the menu displayed by right clicking the tab In the other way the active window can be closed by clicking On the tab Tab x Il Close Active Window Close Right Windows Close Left Windows Close Inactive Windows Close All Tool hint Display a brief explanation when the cursor is moved onto the selected tab Scroll the tab display to the left and right Scroll button l l Display hidden tabs Display a list of windows being displayed Work window switching button Select a data name displayed on the list to display its corresponding window on the top Disp
207. in the antistatic envelope Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction Do not drop or apply a strong impact to the board Doing so may cause a failure or malfunction uoyele3su p suonnesa d Buljpuey pEr 47 4 3 2 Installation environment For installation of the personal computer in which the CC Link IE Field Network board is installed refer to the manual for the personal computer 1 Precautions for board installation environment e Use the board in an environment that meets the general specifications in this manual Failure to do so may result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to or deterioration of the product 2 Precautions for personal computer installation environment e Always ground the personal computer to the protective ground conductor Failure to do so may cause a malfunction 4 3 3 Procedure for replacing mounting brackets The following shows the procedure for replacing a standard size mounting bracket with a low profile size mounting bracket Standard size T for fixing the mounting bracket of board mounting bracket 1 Keep the unused brackets for system reconfiguration 2 Screw tightening torque 0 425 to 0 575Nem 4 34 to 5 86kgf cm 48 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4 3 4 Board installation The following flowchart shows the board installation procedure y Power OFF Power OFF the personal computer Install the board In
208. in the each utility for the station number jobse Bunoyuo y Bues yz 135 12 5 Setting Devices to be Monitored This section explains a method for setting devices to be monitored Screen display O Setting gt Device Setting lt For batch monitor gt lt For 16 point register monitor gt Device Setting Device Setting Device Device Type ue Device Type Device Type ER extension file register El Device Type LX direct link input Block No lal Network No DeviceNo DeviceNo f HEX C DEC ocr 0000 a Setting Register Device List Juw 0000 Change Delete Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Set a type of device to be monitored e Enter a block number for ER Device Type yP Enter a network number for LX LY LB LW LSB and LSW e Enter a value of start I O number divided by 16 in decimal for SPG Set a start number of the device to be monitored Device No HEX Hexadecimal DEC Decimal OCT Octal Register Device List Display a list of registered devices 2 Clickthe Execute button Screen button Setting button Adds the items set for Device Type and Device No to Register Device List e Change button Sets the setting of the device selected in Register Device List to the settings set for Device Type and Device No Delete button Deletes the setting of the device selected in Register Dev
209. includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed C Search removable media floppy CD ROM Include this location in the search D Drivers x86 Browse Don t search will choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware y End Open the Windows Device Manager screen Right click on Network Controller and select Update Driver Software Click Install from a list or specific location Advanced Insert the CD ROM of the software package to the CD ROM drive Select Search for the best driver in these locations lt For 32 bit version operating system gt Check Include this location in the search and specify Drivers x86 of the CD ROM drive to be used Example D Drivers x86 lt For 64 bit version operating system gt Check Include this location in the search and specify Drivers x64 of the CD ROM drive to be used Example D Drivers x64 1 The operating system can be checked by Windows system information For details refer to the Microsoft Knowledge Base http support microsoft com kb 827218 As of August 2013 If the troubleshooting above does not help refer to L Page 198 Section 16 8 Point If Block Never install unsigned driver software is selected under Control Panel
210. ing so may cause the test to fail 4 5 1 Bus I F test Bus I F test checks the hardware of the Bus I F function of the CC Link IE Field Network board The following shows a procedure for performing a test Channel No 181 Mode Bus LF Test Start Test lt Normal completion gt 3 Test Result Bus I F Test was normaly completed lt Abnormal completion gt Test Result Bus I F Test was abnormaly completed Select a board to be tested on the Board Diagnostics screen in CC IE Field Utility 2 gt Page 142 Section 13 1 Set Mode to Bus I F Test and click the Start Test button The result is displayed on Test Result field If the test completes abnormally consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative 91 1891 4 1 SNE LG pueog au jo s s 1 suojepuezg Punim 310499 SIJS L S y 4 5 2 Memory test Memory test checks the hardware of the memory function of the CC Link IE Field Network board The following shows a procedure for performing a test Channel Mo 181 Mode Memory Test bl Start Test lt Normal completion gt Test Result Memory Test was normaly completed lt Abnormal completion gt Test Result Memory Test was abnormaly completed 4 5 3 Hardware test 1 Select a board to be tested on the Board Diagnostics screen in CC IE Field Utility Page 142 Section 13 1 Set Mode to Memory Test and cli
211. ing the board from CC IE Field Utility Display contents XO Online gt Reset Operation Reset Operation Select Board Board 1 Channel No 181 Board Channel Mo 182 Operating procedure 1 Check the check box of the board to be reset 2 Clickthe button The selected board is reset pleog Bumaesay y i 127 CHAPTER 12 MONITORING This chapter explains the operation and setting methods of the monitoring function This function is performed using Device Monitor Utility 12 1 Overview of Device Monitor Utility 1 Overview Device Monitor Utility is a utility to monitor devices and change current values The utility is started from the menu of CC IE Field Utility or from Windows start lt CC IE Field Utility gt H CC IE Field Utility i Project Edit View Online Diagnostics Window Help AA EE Channel No Setting d from Board lt Device Monitor Utility gt Device Monitor Utility aa 181 CC IE Field The Channel Information in the Current Display Screen Bit device Network No 0 Station No 255 Vertical indication lt Windows start menu gt e gt Device Monitor Utility bp MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 2 Log Off 0 Shut Down m a m CCIE Field Board 2 Operation flow The following flowchart shows a basic monitoring operation flow lt
212. ink IE Field Network software package CD ROM Software license agreement Q81BD J71GF11 T2 Before Using the Product Q81BD J71GF11 T2 CC Link IE Field Network Interface Board SW1DNC CCIEF B CC Link IE Field Network software package CD ROM Low Profile Bracket Software license agreement 20 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW CHAPTER 1 overview 1 1 CC Link IE Field Network CC Link IE Field Network is a high speed and large capacity open field network that is based on Ethernet technology 1000BASE T 1 Data communication High speed and large capacity data communication is available between a master station and slave stations on the CC Link IE Field Network a Periodic communication cyclic transmission Data is periodically communicated among stations within the same network gt Page 65 Section 5 2 Master local User module program A eae AJOMISN PlP 4 31 AUTO UL b Non periodic communication transient transmission Data is communicated upon request gt Page 73 Section 5 3 User program Local station CPU module main mdOpen 181 1 amp path mdSendEx path 1 1 oe mdClose path Write request Device Write data 21 22 2 1Gbps communication speed 1Gbps communication speed allows high speed communication Also the takt time can be reduced due to the improved performance of communication response 3 Use of Ethern
213. ion environment K Page 186 Section 16 7 1 e Checking cables and wiring Page 186 Section 16 7 3 e Board test K gt Page 191 Section 16 7 10 1 If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to K Page 198 Section 16 8 16 5 4 Station is disconnected The following explains the troubleshooting when the following symptoms occurred and the station is disconnected e A station which has been communicating normally is suddenly disconnected e Data cannot be read to write from the accessed station e Communication with accessed station occasionally fails e A relevant station repeats network connection and disconnection When the station is disconnected check the following items Item Corrective action Is there any ambient temperature or noise influence Check the installation environment Page 186 Section 16 7 1 Is there an error on the cable or hub e Check the cable and wire gt Page 186 Section 16 7 3 Is the wiring properly If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to K Page 198 Section 16 8 181 NddOoO uey Jsyjo S INDOW Ndo O PSssa99e aq JOUUPD uweJ1BoJ1d JOSN ZG OL yur eyeq 104 Bujooysejqnos g 9l 16 5 5 Communication is unstable When the link scan time and transmission delay time is abnormally longer or a timeout occurs during transient transmission check the following items Item Is there any ambient temperature or noise influence Is the D LINK LED of the master or
214. ions higher than the maximum station number are ignored This stores if a reserved station function is disabled OFF No disabled reserved station function ON Disabled reserved station function found If a reserved station function is disabled the status of each station can be checked by the Reserved station function disable status SW0180 to SW0187 O Depending on the timing of the link refresh the Reserved station function disable status SW0180 to SW0187 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF 235 sn gS ejey jeloeds yu xipuaddy Appendix 4 Link Special Register SW List 236 Link special registers SW store information during data link as numerical values Error locations and causes can be checked by using and monitoring link special registers SW in programs 1 Application of link special registers SW By using link special registers SW the status of the CC Link IE Field Network can be checked 2 Ranges of areas that are turned ON OFF by users and by the system The following is a range when the link special register SW is assigned from SWO0000 to SWO1FF e Range where data are stored by users SWO0000 to SW001F e Range where data are stored by the system SW0020 to SW01FF 3 Link Special Register SW List A list of link special registers SW when they are assigned from SW0000 to SWO1FF is describ
215. isk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do Found New Hardware Wizard Please choose your search and installation options SS Y Search for the best driver in these locations Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed C Search removable media floppy CD ROM Include this location in the search v Browse D ADriversix86 O Dont search will choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware Cos Cera End The Found New Hardware Wizard screen is displayed after installing the board and starting up the personal computer Select Install from a list or specific location Advanced and click the button Select Search for the best driver in these locations lt For 32 bit version operating system gt Check Include this location in the search and specify Drivers x86 of the CD ROM drive to be used Example D Drivers x86 lt For 64 bit version operating system gt Check Include this location in the search and specify Drivers x64 of the CD ROM drive to be used Example D Drivers x64 1 The operating system can be checked by Windows system information For details refer to the Microsoft Knowledge
216. ition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics take action and retry the operation e Check if the routing parameters are correctly set e Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics take action and retry the operation e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation e When the mode of the master station is Online High Speed Mode change it to Online Normal Mode and retry the operation e Check if the routing parameters are correctly set e Correct the header information at the request source and retry the operation e Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics take action and retry the operation e Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and take action SI BPOD 10113 6 9L e If the number of slave stations per network is more than 120 reduce it to 120 or less e Check Communication Destination Setting of the communication test and retry the operation e After completion of the cable test retry it e Refer to corrective action for hardware error gt Page 210 1 in this section e When using the CCPASET instruction check the intelligent function module switch settings and write the setting data to the CPU module e When not using the CCPASET instruction clear the intelligent function module switch settings and write the setting data to the CPU module e If this error persists please consult
217. ittle while e Change the storage Data are sent When attempting data send consecutively Channel busy dedicated instruction error occurs at the sending station because the channel is being used by the driver and thus the sent data cannot be received consecutively from the sending channel of the target station station When 128 received data are stored to the reception buffer of each channel number the 129th and the following received data are discarded by the driver after they are received by the board and before they are stored to the reception buffer When the data whose execution type is set to with arrival confirmation are sent from the sending side a normal completion is established at the sending side because the board receives data once however data are Normally completed data at the sending side are discarded e Retry it after a little while discarded b Event notification Events can be notified to a user program at the data reception The event notification is set in the event setting of the network parameter gt Page 117 Section 10 2 4 i 4 Detection ne Word Device ol 2 RECY Function Bdge Detect ______ _____ o dl E O O Received data can be obtained as events in a user program by specifying event numbers set in the event setting using the mdWaitBdEvent function The received data are read by executing the mdReceiveEx mdReceive function after the return of the mdWai
218. k No 3 Station No 5 No 5 No 2 to communicate with network No 1 o target automatically sjajaweJed Bunnoy Z 0L JaJBWUeJeY YIOMION Buinas ZOL Point O Setting for stations that do not perform transient transmission to other networks Routing parameters are not required for stations that do not perform transient transmission to other networks however setting the same routing parameters to all stations is recommended 1 1 Station which does not perform transient transmission It is recommended to set the same routing parameters as __ for and __ can communicate by the same routing parameters since they pass through the same relay station Note that routing parameters need not to be set for stations for which routing parameters are not available such as a station including a head module The station communicates with other networks according to routing parameters set to the master station 123 CHAPTER 11 OPERATING BOARD ONLINE This chapter explains a method for operating a board online using CC IE Field Utility 11 1 Setting Board Channel Numbers This section explains a method for checking setting board channel numbers Display contents W Online gt Channel No Setting Channel No Setting LED of the board is the Following displays while being opening this screen Please change Channel Mo if necessary Channel Mo iei 182 Current value i ERR 5D RUN Setting value Channel M
219. k devices Address Decimal Hexadecimal Name Reference O to 1023 0000H to O3FFH Page 218 1 in this section 1024 to 2047 0400H to O7FFH Page 218 2 in this section 2048 to 10239 0800H to 27FFH Page 219 3 in this section 10240 to 18431 2800H to 47FFH Remote register RWr Page 219 4 in this section 18432 to 18463 4800H to 481FH Link special relay SB Page 219 5 in this section 18464 to 18975 4820H to 4A1FH Link special register SW Page 219 6 in this section 1 Remote input RX Address 0 to 1023 0000H to 03FFH The areas to store the value of RX The RX start number and number of points for each station number can be checked by the RX offset size information 2 gt Page 220 Appendix 2 2 1 Each bit corresponds to 1 bit of RX Buffer memory b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO addresses Ry RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX 0 0000H e p lele lalgs laiz lils lalalala 4 0 RX RX RX RX Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx RX Rx RX Rx RX RX 1023 03FFH 3FFF 3FFE 3FFD 3FFC 3FFB 3FFA 3FF9 3FF8 3FF7 3FF6 3FF5 3FF4 3FF3 3FF2 3FF1 3FFO 2 Remote output RY Address 1024 to 2047 0400H to 07FFH The areas to store the value of RY The RY start number and number of points for each station number can be checked by the RY offset size information _ gt Page 220 Appendix 2 2 2 o
220. l Gh Network Location Awar This service C Office Source Engine The Offline Parental Controls This service 4 m Extended A Standard 7 Setting completion Point e When MELSECPowerManager is disabled the personal computer may enter the power save mode hibernate sleep automatically depending on the settings on the personal computer Do not disable MELSECPowerManager because the CC Link IE Field Network board does not function normally if the personal computer enters the power save mode hibernate sleep For the behavior of the board when the personal computer enters the power save mode hibernate sleep or the fast startup function is enabled refer to the following appendix gt Page 268 Appendix 12 4 APPENDIX Check if MELSECPowerManager is registered e If MELSECPowerManager is disabled accidentally right click MELSECPowerManager on the Services Local screen and select Start from the menu File Action View Help 9 GlOcs Bm gt s n mp coy Services Local MELSECPowerManager Start the service A Name Description e Media Center Extender S 7 MELSECPowerManager e Microsoft NET Framew e Microsoft NET Framew 01 Microsoft NET Framew k Microsoft NET Framew Gj Microsoft iSCSI Initiator Ch Microsoft Software Sha i Multimedia Class Sched o Net Msmg Listener Ada o Net Pipe Listener Adapter e Net
221. l ea pie The display is switched to the project list by double clicking Workspace Workspace Name Display the selected workspace name Project Name Display the selected project name Title Display the title of the selected project 2 Clickthe _ button The specified project is displayed Screen button e Browse button Displays the Browse For Folder screen Point Workspace A workspace is a folder of CC IE Field Utility dedicated to manage multiple projects under the same name Do not change the workspace configuration using an application such as Windows Explorer Network drive display on the Browse For Folder screen When the network drive display is not displayed log on to Windows as a user who has an access authority to the assigned folder 102 CHAPTER 9 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9 3 Saving Projects Save a project in a hard disk or other memory media of a personal computer 1 Saving projects under the specified name Save the open project under the specified name Screen display O Project gt Save As Save As Save Folder Path L Documents and Settings XP My Documents Browse Workspace Project List O wWorkspace2 Workspace Name Workspacel Project Name fF Title FO cme w 0 mM Operating procedure 2 y 1 Set the items on the screen O Item Description o Enter the folder drive path where the workspace is saved Save Folder Path The folde
222. l processing Stores the parameter status 0 Normal 1 or higher Abnormal lt 7 Page 199 Section 16 9 O Conditions e This is enabled when the Received parameter error SBO04D is ON Stores the results when cyclic transmission is started by Link start own O station SB0000 0 Normal 1 or higher Abnormal lt 7 Page 199 Section 16 9 When Link start own station SB0000 is turned OFF the stored error definition is cleared Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores the results when cyclic transmission is stopped by Link stop own station SBO001 0 Normal 1 or higher Abnormal lt 7 Page 199 Section 16 9 When Link stop own station SB0001 is turned OFF the stored error definition is cleared Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF APPENDIX Availability Number Description Master Local station station Stores the results when cyclic transmission is started by System link start SB0002 0 Normal 1 or higher Error definition in own station lt 77 Page 199 Section 16 9 Data link start status SW0052 l When System link start SB0002 is turned OFF the stored error definition x entire system is cleared Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores the results when cyclic tra
223. l versions Version 1 05F or later Windows Server 2008 64 bit version Windows Server 2008 R2 Version 1 02C or later Windows 7 64 bit version Windows Server 2012 Version 1 04E or later Windows 8 b User authority Log on as a user having administrator authority e Installation and uninstallation are available only by the administrator s authority e The Usage of utilities is available only by the administrator s authority 35 juawuoJnnuy Bunelado sz 36 c NET Framework 3 5 When using one of the following operating system NET Framework 3 5 is required e Windows Server 2012 e Windows 8 Enable the NET Framework 3 5 including NET 2 0 or 3 0 in Turn Windows features on or off on the control panel d The functions cannot be used The following functions of operating system cannot be used If an attempt is made to use any of the following functions this product may not operate normally Activating the application with Windows compatible mode Simplified user switch over Remote desktop Large font size Advanced setting of screen property DPI setting other than 100 set the size of text and illustration other than smaller 100 Power save mode Standby Hibernate Sleep Fast startup The language switching function set by Regional and Language Options Windows XP Mode Windows Touch or Touch Modern Ul Client Hyper V Server Core Installation e When exiting the operatin
224. lation formula for the link refresh time Number of boards that can be installed x 1 ms lt For Intel Core 2 Duo processor 1 8GHz gt With a single board installed the link refresh time of maximum link device points 36k bytes is less than 1ms Point Affection by other driver processing and Windows kernel processing The execution of the link refresh processing may be delayed by the interruption of other driver processing or Windows kernel processing Appendix 5 2 Link scan time The following is a calculation formula for the link refresh time when the link scan mode is asynchronous RX points RY points LS AAA RWr points RWw points x2 x 0 08 8 Number of connected slave stations x Ka Kb Kc Kd 1000 Number of event conditions in Event Setting x 0 02 ms Cyclic transmission mode Normal mode High speed mode Item Conditions Value When Turn OFF or 0 Clear Input Data RX RY is set in the 18 5 Ka 25 8 Network Operation Setting When Hold input Data RX RY is set in the Network Operation 9 75 Setting Kb 655 168 Kc 160 60 x Total number of slave stations 30 Maximum transient processing time set in the parameters Kd Maximum data link processing time when disconnecting from network or reconnecting to network 9000 Total number of ports used in the switching hub x 3000 204 APPENDIX Appendix 5 3 Transmission delay time The following are the calculation form
225. lay screens such as the Network Parameter Setting the Number of CC IE Display windows Field Cards screen 98 CHAPTER 8 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 1 Arranging displaying windows This function displays a list of open windows and also opens and arranges specified windows This function is useful to display the desired window efficiently when multiple windows are open Display contents O Window gt Window Window Select Window iNetwork Parameter CC IE Field Network Configuration iNetwork Parameter CC IE Field Number of Boards Setti Close Window Cascade Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically Minimize gt e SMOPUIM JOM Z 8 suo eJado oIseg pue uoNesnbyUuoD Uaalos 28 99 8 3 Help Function 100 1 Displaying manuals Display the manual of the CC Link IE Field Network board Operating procedure 1 7D Help gt Manual 2 Checking version of CC IE Field Utility Display information such as the software version of CC IE Field Utility Operating procedure 1 7D Help gt About S41 DRC CCIEF B 1 004 CC IE Field Utility 2010 12 27 Copyright 7 2011 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION All Rights Reserved CHAPTER 9 PROJECT MANAGEMENT CHAPTER 9 PROJECT MANAGEMENT This chapter explains basic operations of CC IE Field Utility such as creating opening and saving projects 9 1 Creating Projects Create a new project Screen display O
226. ld Utility 3 Project Edit view Online Diagnostics Project Edit View Online Diagnostics Drag and drop b Docking Display a toolbar docked to the main frame Operating procedure 1 Drag the title bar of a floating toolbar and drop it in the main frame CC IE Field Utility 8 CC IE Field Utility Project Edit View Online Diagnostics Project Edit View Online Diagnostics gt uy Y Drag and drop Point O Method for docking a toolbar at the original position To dock a floating toolbar back at the original position double click on the title bar of the toolbar 96 CHAPTER 8 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 3 Customizing toolbars This function sets the types of tool buttons to be displayed in each toolbar Operating procedure 1 XX Toolbar options button 2 gt Add or Remove Buttons A list of tool buttons is displayed AA IA Add or Remove Buttons Standard gt Board common gt iv Reset Reset Toolbar 2 Check the check box in front of the tool button to be displayed on the screen The checked tool buttons are displayed on the screen 9 New Open ee seve gt DA Reset Toolbar The toolbar configuration returns to the default when Reset Toolbar is selected sieqjool c c 8 suo eJado oIseg pue uoNeinByUuoD Uaalos 28 97 8 2 3 Work windows A work window is a main screen used for operations such as parameter setting and monitoring
227. licy Configuration 1 y Policy Security Setting 2 Network security Restrict NTLM NTLM authentication in th Not Defined la Network security Restrict NTLM Outgoing NTLM traffic to Not Defined Recovery console Allow automatic administrative logon Disabled Jig Recovery console Allow floppy copy and access to all drives Disabled Shutdown Allow system to be shut down without having to Enabled Shutdown Clear virtual memory pagefile Disabled y System cryptography Force strong key protection for user k Not Defined 1 System cryptography Use FIPS compliant algorithms for en Disabled le System objects Require case insensitivity for non Windows Enabled 2 System objects Strengthen default permissions of internal s Enabled bie System settings Optional subsystems Posix System settings Use Certificate Rules on Windows Executabl Disabled i User Account Control Admin Approval Mode for the Built i Disabled User Account Control Allow UlAccess applications to prom Disabled 5 User Account Control Behavior of the elevation prompt for Prompt for consent for User Account Control Behavior of the elevation prompt for Prompt for credentials a User Account Control Detect application installations and p Enabled o User Account Control Only elevate executables that are sign Disabled User Account Control Only elevate UlAccess applications th Enabled a User Account Co
228. link with other stations Offline Select this mode to disconnect the station from the network for stopping data link with other stations 111 10 2 2 Network configuration setting Set parameters of slave stations slave station points link device assignment to the master station and set link scan mode and block data assurance per station This setting is available when CC IE Field Master Station is selected in the network setting Display contents W View gt Network Parameter lt gt CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting screen c gt Network Configuration Setting Network Parameter CC IE Field Network Configuration Setting Board No 1 E Set up Network configuration Assignment Method Supplementary Setting Equal Assignment Identical Point Assignment Clear Check End Cancel Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Assignment Method Select an assignment method for send range of each station Number of PLCs Display the number of stations from 1 to total stations Set the station number Station No Setting range 1 to 120 Station Type Select the station type Specify the number of relay points on the link side Setting range Points 16 to 2048 points for Local Station and Intelligent Device Station 16 to 128 points for Remote Device Station RX RY Setting 16 to 64 points for Remote I O Station Start Specify the start point of relay on the link side Setting
229. lish version Monitor system y 52 Hard disk space Disk drive 34 Windows Description supported personal computer System requirements of the operating system must be met For Q80BD J71GF11 T2 e Compliant with PCI standard Rev 2 2 3 3VDC 5VDC 32 bit bus 33MHz frequency For Q81BD J71GF11 T2 e Compliant with PCI Express bus standard 1 1 3 3VDC maximum data bandwidth of 250MB s 100MHz frequency Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Service Pack 3 or later Windows XP Home Edition Operating System Service Pack 3 or later Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard x64 Edition Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise x64 Edition Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Windows Vista Windows Vista Windows Vista Windows Vista Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Home Premium Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Business Operating System Servic
230. loy 2 91 16 7 11 Checking LED status The LED status can also be checked by the LED display on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen gt Page 153 Section 13 2 2 7 other than checking the board visually Point When using the software package version 1 04E or later the LED status of MODE L ERR cannot be confirmed on the CC IE Field diagnostics screen Confirm the LED status with the value stored in the following link special relays SB and link special registers SW LED Status SB SW The value of SW0043 is 0 or 1 MODE The value of SW0043 is 2 OFF The value of SW0043 is 6 7 or 9 SB0049 is OFF D LINK SB0049 is ON and SD0047 is OFF OFF SB0049 is ON and SD0047 is ON SB006C is ON or SB006D is ON a OFF SBOO6C is OFF and SBOO6D is OFF Check the LED status and take the corresponding corrective actions se pre Description Reference Operating normally Data send receive is not eee Corrective action ae a ene non aD j He Communication error has occurred Page 180 Section 16 5 1 TT gt hardware failure or a board WDT error has Page 178 Section 16 4 1 occurred LED ON Driver is not started Page 179 Section 16 4 3 Flash ON Driver WDT error has occurred Page 179 Section 16 4 2 Flash ON _ PCI bus PCI Express bus error has occurred Page 179 Section 16 4 4 P1 P2 A T normally e The module received normal data Corrective action RJ45 connect
231. lt 7 Page 199 Section 16 9 SWwo0040 Ketworkn mber Stores the network number of own station Range 1 to 239 Stores the station number of own station SW0042 Station number Range 125 master station 1 to 120 slave station 0 station number is SW0031 not set 238 APPENDIX Availability Number Description Master Local station station Stores the mode of own station 0 Online Normal Mode Local station Online 1 Online High Speed Mode 2 Offline SW0043 Mode status 6 Loop test 7 Self loopback test 9 Hardware test Stores the own station s hardware status b15 to b2 b1 bO O SW0046 Module type lid ooo Module type 00 Module 01 Board 10 Display Stores the baton pass status for the own station transient transmission possible 0 Data link in progress Baton pass status own i SW0047 2 Baton pass in progress station 3 Baton pass stopped 4 Test in progress 5 Offline gt e Stores the cause of interruption in the communication baton pass of own station 00H At normal communication or power on Cause of baton pass 30H Cable disconnection O interruption 33H Disconnection or reconnection in progress 40H Offline mode 41H Hardware test 42H Self loopback test SW0048 Stores the cause which stopped the data link of own station OOH At normal communication or power on 01H Stop command issued 02H Monitoring timeout 05H No slave
232. lt Not applicable Version of SW1DNC CCIEF B 1 03D or earlier 1 04E or later Serial number 14052 or lower 15102 or higher UOHOUNA AOAY GNAS VS 19 1 Channel use for dedicated instruction A channel is an area of a CC Link IE Field Network board where data handled by a SEND RECV function is stored By using multiple channels it is possible to simultaneously access from the own station to other stations or concurrently read from and write to the same board a Number of channels The CC Link IE Field Network board has 2 channels that can be used for SEND RECV function By using 2 channels simultaneously the sending and receiving of two data can be executed at the same time b Precautions When executing the sending and receiving of multiple data simultaneously make sure that the channels for the instructions are not duplicated The sending and receiving for which the same channel is specified cannot be executed simultaneously To use the same channel for multiple sending and receiving execute one after completion of another c Example e When accessing from the own station to multiple other stations simultaneously Change the channel used for the own station for each target station Station No 0 Station No 1 Own station Other station Channel 1 Channel 1 Channel 2 Station No 2 Other station Channel 1 Channel 1 For send SEND Channel 2 For send SEND e W
233. m Reference Master station Local stations Network setting Page 110 Section 10 2 MeO Network Configuration RWw RWr Setting a ae Paco ME Sesion 1052 Setting Reserved Error Invalid Station PA o psa y ar O a Q Supplementary Setting aaa 3 9 Network Operation Setting A Page 116 Section 10 2 3 E 10 Event Setting A Page 117 Section 10 2 4 Driver Setting O Page 119 Section 10 2 5 Target Setting A Page 120 Section 10 2 6 Routing Parameters Page 121 Section 10 2 7 Point When parameters are not set CC Link IE Field Network board operates as a local station station number 1 of network number 1 in the offline mode In this case only transient transmission is performed Cyclic transmission is not performed 109 10 2 Setting Network Parameter Set the network number station number and other parameters for the CC Link IE Field Network board Display contents W View gt Network Parameter Network Parameter CC JE Field Number of Boards Setting Network Type Channel No Network No Total Stations Station No Mode Event Setting Event Setting Driver Setting Driver Setting ss Target Setting Target Setting A cessary Setting No Setting Already Set Set if itis meeded No Setting Already Set Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Network setting Network Type Select the network type L gt Page 111
234. me routing parameters to all the control CPUs 1 111 Control CPU setting Set the same routing parameters 122 CHAPTER 10 SETTING PARAMETERS 2 Stations that need routing parameter settings Routing parameter settings are required for relay stations and a request source which performs transient transmission to other networks Ex A setting to perform transient transmission from the station number 2 on the network number 1 to the station number 4 on the network number 3 CC Link IE Field Network Network No 1 Master station Request source C Oda 0000 0000 poda 0000 0000 Relay station 2 Station Station No 4 No 5 a Relay station 1 Station Station No 3 No 1 E Network No 2 Request target Station Transient transmission request Transient transmission response Target Network Relay Network Mo Mo Station Mo Request source No 2 No 2 Transmit data through station No 3 on network No 1 to communicate with network No 3 Target Network Relay Network Relay Station Mo No Station Mo Relay No 3 Pass data to the request source station 1 Station on network No 1 No 1 Transmit data through station No 4 on network No 2 to communicate with network No 3 Target Network Relay Network Relay No Po Station Mo Relay No 4 Passes data to the request target No 4 1 station 2 Transmit data through station No 1 on network Station on networ
235. mmunicate with stations on a different kind of network configure communication paths with routing parameters in advance Instruction that facilitates programming for the functions of the intelligent function modules Operation that is performed to restart data link when a faulty station returns to normal Operation that is performed to stop data link when a data link error occurs Term Loopback Device Link device Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote register RWr Remote register RWw Link special relay SB Link special register SW Link scan time Link refresh Baton pass Buffer memory RAS MD function Board WDT Driver WDT Description Function that disconnects the station in which an error has occurred from the network and continues data link with the stations that are operating normally Stations connected after the faulty station can also continue data link One of various devices X Y M D etc inside a CPU module One of various devices RX RY RWw RWr etc inside a module on CC Link IE Field Network Bit data that is input from the slave station to the master station with some exceptions for local stations Bit data that is output from the master station to the slave station with some exceptions for local stations 16 bit data word data that is input from the slave station to the master station with some exceptions for local stations 16 bit data word data that is output from the ma
236. mmunication error occurred ERR LED is ON Flashing Station is disconnected from the network unexpectedly e Page 180 Section 16 5 1 User program cannot be accessed to CPU module other than QCPU The board cannot perform communication while executing an e Page 181 Section 16 5 2 e Page 181 Section 16 5 3 user program occasionally e The connected station is disconnected unexpectedly e The data cannot be read written from to the accessed station ft Aa l l e Page 181 Section 16 5 4 e Communication with accessed station occasionally fails e A relevant station repeats network connection and disconnection The cyclic transmission cannot be performed e The output of the own station does not reach the accessed station e The change of the input from the accessed station does not AS OO reach the own station e An unexpected value is set to the link device The transient transmission cannot be performed The data cannot be written to the accessed station e The data cannot be read from the accessed station l e Page 184 Section 16 6 2 e The data cannot be monitored with the utility e The data cannot be read written while accessing to the device using a communication function with a user program CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 2 Troubleshooting for Installation Uninstallation The following explains the troubleshooting for error at installation or uninstallation e Installation failed Page 169
237. n The status of valid or invalid of the value stored in 20520 5028H Pon enn maton the own SIRON controller information is stored valid invalid flag 0 Invalid 1 Valid 20521 5029H 20522 502AH 20523 502BH 20524 502CH The own station s board information is stored 20525 to 20534 502DH to 5036H Vendor specific device 20535 to 20536 5037H to 5038H information 222 APPENDIX Appendix 2 4 Other station information The areas to store the other stations information on the network 1 Other station network card information station number 1 Address 20544 to 20551 5040H to 5047h Address Decimal Hexadecimal Description 20544 5040H Manufacturer code 20545 504 1H Model type The information of other station station No 1 is 20546 5042H Model code stored 20547 5043H Version 20548 to 20551 5044H to 504 7H System area 2 Other station controller information station number 1 Address 20552 to 20575 5048H to 505FH Address Decimal Hexadecimal Name Description The status of valid or invalid of the value stored in the other station controller information station Controller information 20552 5048H number 1 is stored valid invalid flag O Invalid 1 Valid 20553 5049H 20554 504AH 20555 504BH 20556 504ChH The own station s information is stored 20557 to 20566 504DH to 5056H 20567 to 20568 5057H to 5058H SREO P EEEE information 20569 t
238. n 16 4 1 542 021EH 543 021FH 2 For information events The following information event logs other than errors are displayed in the system log of the event viewer The corrective actions are not required for the following events 1024 E Driver started normally At driver startup 0400H 1025 At board reset Board reset was executed 0401H Except for board reset at driver startup 1026 bo 04021 Network parameter was updated At common parameter transmission by master station 1027 l State information was updated At driver operation log update 04031 190 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 7 8 Checking channel numbers Check if the channel numbers are properly assigned to the boards on the Channel No Setting screen L gt Page 124 Section 11 1 Check Corrective action e Check the Device Manager screen Page 188 Section 16 7 6 e Check the Event Viewer screen E Page 189 Section 16 7 7 Are all installed boards displayed Are channel numbers duplicated e Set channel numbers not to duplicate 16 7 9 Checking operations with board diagnostics Check the contents displayed in the board list on the Board Diagnostics screen lt gt Page 142 Section 13 1 Check Corrective action Are all installed boards displayed e Check the channel numbers _ gt Page 191 Section 16 7 8 e Check the error code and perform the corrective action described in the Is a board error occurring error co
239. n display Select Diagnostics Destination Board Board liNetwork No 1 Change Board Select Station Station No 3fError Display contents Item Description Board Display the selected diagnostics target board and the network number E Display the station number of the station selected in the network configuration Select Station Set the station number to be selected Screen button e Change Board button Displays the Change Board screen 2 gt Page 144 Section 13 2 1 Point O Selecting a target from Network Status A diagnostics target can also be selected from the network configuration of Network Status 2 Monitor status Display current monitoring status Screen display Monitor Status f A Monitoring ene start Monitor Stop Monitor Screen button e Start Monitor button Starts monitoring Stop Mentor button Stops monitoring 148 CHAPTER 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 3 Network status Screen display Network Status Total Slave Stations Set In Parameter Number of Station Errors Detected Total Slave Stations Connected Pa Current Link PA mal l 3 Scan Time l ms E Display contents Item Description Total Slave Stations Display the total number of slave stations the link scan time in units of ms and the Current Link Scan Time number of stations error occurrences on the network being displayed The Number of Sta
240. n display W Menu gt 16 point register monitor 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 D00A 0006 o00c 000D 000E 0000F 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 0018 0019 001A 0016 001 001D 001E 001F 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 DODA 0006 o00C 000D 000E 0000F 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 0018 0019 001A 0016 001 001D 001E 001F OOOO 00 k O o oo co cc vc OOOO 0 0 0 0 0O oo c cv co cc OOOO O OOO Oo oo co CO Cc CoO Co co 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 134 CHAPTER 12 MONITORING 12 4 Setting Monitoring Target This section explains the method for setting a programmable controller CPU or CC Link IE Field Network board to be monitored Set a target when starting Device Monitor Utility Screen display W Setting gt Network Setting Network Setting Channel 481 CC IE Field F Network Setting Own Sta C Other Sta Cancel Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Channel Set the access source channel number to be used Set the monitoring target Network Setting Set the network number and the station number when the access target is at another station 2 Click the Execute button Point O Accessing multiple CPU system Enter 0 for the network number and a value of logical station number which was set
241. n is performed by link scan time While constant link scan is used to keep link scan time constant the transmission delay time is not kept constant by this function Set constant link scan in increments of ims 2 Equal assignment Equally assign link devices to local stations with preset conditions Display contents W View gt Network Parameter gt CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting screen gt Network Configuration Setting gt Network Configuration Setting screen c gt Equal Assignment button Equal Assignment RX RY Equal Assignment Start Station Station End Station Station Start No Total Points Assigned RWW R Wr Equal Assignment Start Station Station End Station Station Start No Total Points Assigned Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description RX RY Equal Assignment Set the start station number of local stations for which link devices are equally assigned Start Station 1991818 d YIOMISN Bumes COL Setting range 1 to the end slave station number uzas uoeiNBYUOS YIOMION Z Z OL Set the end station number of local stations for which link devices are equally assigned End Station Setting range Start station number to the end slave station number Set the start number of link devices to be equally assigned Start No Setting range 0 to 3FFO Set the total points of link devices to be equally assigned Setting range
242. n modified since it was published The publisher s identity cannot be verified because of a problem The signature contains a time stamp However the time stamp could not be verified Do you still want to install this driver software No More Info procedure This screen is displayed at the first installation Click the Continue Anyway button The operation test has been conducted by Mitsubishi Problems do not occur after the installation The following screen may appear behind another screen Then press the keys to bring it to the front For Windows Server 2003 R2 one of the screens shown on the left is displayed at the first installation Click the Yes button 171 UONE JEISU SJIUM an1 09118 JOU S USaJos ay uo paAejdsip UONIY Z 9L uonejesutun uonelesu 10 BunooysajqnoJ z 9 172 Security Alert Driver Installation xj The driver software you are installing for E2SocketGOT has not been properly signed with Authenticode TM technology Therefore Windows cannot tell if the software has been modified since it was published The publisher s identity cannot be verified because of a problem The signature contains a time stamp However the time stamp could not be verified Do you still want to install this driver software More Info Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for current and updated software by looking on your computer
243. n the Network Configuration Setting Page 112 Section 10 2 2 Not actually connected rs gt E 5 h 5 BE IE ERE Master station Slave station Slave station Slave station Station No 0 Station No 1 Station No 2 Station No 3 Reserved station Network Configuration Setting Ree Setting ES A Setting Mumber a PLCS Station Mo Station Type jene ee Reserved Error Invalid Station pot focal Station oooa oo 8 ooon No Setting a AO E O 0008 cor TE C a alinteligent Device Station tej 0020 o0r a ooo Select Reserved Station 2 Reserved station function disable and cancel This is used when connecting a reserved status slave station to the network Reserved station function disable and cancel is set on Reserved Station Function Enable screen L gt Page 161 Section 13 2 7 82 CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS 5 6 Error Invalid Station and Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting Function When a slave station is set as an error invalid station even if it is disconnected from the network during data link the master station will not detect it as error station Furthermore by the temporary error invalid station setting function a slave station can be temporarily set as an error invalid station 1 Error invalid station setting A slave station can be set as an error invalid station in Network Configuration Setting C gt Page 112 Section 10 2 2 ic I Jag M
244. nction Setting on the Supplementary Setting screen in Network Configuration Setting gt Page 114 Section 10 2 2 1 CC IE Field Supplementary Setting on 00 Link Scan Mode Setting a Constant Scan O O ss le o 2 Coopback Function Setting M m me e TI AS sor g c y M Use 5 O Please build network configuration ring configuration gt that the end stations of Line Connection are connected l Select the check box O to each other y 5 NiO SS a Block Data Assurance per Station WV Assure Block Data ca 2 Precautions For network topology other than ring topology clear the check box If the loopback function setting and the network configuration are inconsistent an error may occur in all stations and data link cannot be performed Whether loopback is being performed or not can be checked by link special relay SB and link special register SW for the master station L gt Page 224 Appendix 3 Page 236 Appendix 4 85 5 9 Driver WDT function Driver WDT function monitors the operation of the software operating system driver inside the hardware by the timer function on CC Link IE Field Network board When the driver cannot reset the timer of the board within the specified driver WDT monitoring time CC Link IE Field Network board detects driver WDT error Driver WDT function detects driver operation delay due to the access error from the driver to CC Link IE Field Network board o
245. nd New Hardware Wizard screen gt Page 173 Section 16 2 4 When the driver installation is completed normally the following driver is displayed on the Device Manager screen of Windows Device name Driver name MELSEC CC Link IE Field Device MELSEC CC Link IE Field Controller UOHE E SU CY d Service application To prevent a personal computer entering the power save mode hibernate sleep MELSECPowerManager is installed automatically under the specific operating system For details of MELSECPowerManager refer to the following section gt Page 271 Appendix 13 3 When installation is aborted or failed When the installation is aborted or failed take corrective actions following the troubleshooting Page 169 Section 16 2 1 89 6 3 Uninstallation This section explains a procedure for uninstalling the software package 1 Uninstallation procedure 1 Uninstall the software package from the control panel screen of Windows Point O lfa screen confirming the deletion of common files appears at uninstallation Select No to All If deleting common files other applications may not operate normally O lfa screen confirming the execution of restart appears at the completion of uninstallation Select Yes want to restart my computer now and restart the personal computer O MELSECPowerManager may not be uninstalled depending on the installation state which affects the other installed software p
246. ne gt Reset operation 61 159 UONCOIUNWWOD p Buin J9YW SIS L p Communication Test Communication Test Contents Connected Station Own Target Station Communication Data Setting Network No 1 Network No 2 Data Length 100 Byte Communication Count 1 Times Inward Communication Monitoring Time 5 Second Outward Station No 01 stationNo 2 y Execute Test Check the transient communication rounte from the connected station to the destination station Communication Test Communication Test Contents Connected Station Own Target Station Network No 1 crate Network No Data Length 100 Byte Station No 0 gt Station No y Communication Count 1 Times Inward Communication Monitoring Time 5 Second L y Execute Test Check the transient communication rounte from the connected station to the destination station Communication Data Setting Communication Test Result i Connected Station Own 4 4 Target Station Communication Information Outwari Network No 2 gt Network No 2 Communication Count 1 Times Station No 0 2 j 0 een Station No Communication Time ms Outward ae Communication test has been completed Network No Own Station Target Station Point Open the Communication Test screen and set data to Communication Destination Setting and Communication Data Setting O Select
247. nformation Read Staton No 120 RY ofset No 120 RY offset Staton No 20 ze No 120 RY size Semara area A CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Initial Read write Refer to value Hexadecimal 19968 Station No 1 RWw offset 4E00H 19969 Station No 1 RWw size 4E01H Page 221 to RWw offset size information Read Appendix 20206 2 2 3 Station No 120 RWw offset 4EEEH 20207 Station No 120 RWw size 4EEFH Address Decimal O 20208 to 20223 System area 4EFOH to 4EFFH 20224 l Station No 1 RWr offset 4F00H 20225 Station No 1 RWr size 4F01H Page 221 to RWr offset size information Read Appendix 20462 2 2 4 Station No 120 RWr offset 4FEEH 20463 Station No 120 RWr size 4FEFH 20464 to 20511 System area a 4FFOH to 501FH 20512 Manufacturer code 5020H 20513 Model type a 5021H Own station a Page 222 20514 network card information Appendix 2 3 a Model code o 5022H wm a 20515 l 0 Version 5 5023H z 20516 to 20519 3 System area ie 5024H to 5027H 20520 Controller information valid a 5028H invalid flag E 20521 Y Manufacturer code 5029H 20522 Model type 502AH 20523 O tati Page 222 ae sas l Model code Read write i 502BH controller information Appendix 2 3 20524 l Version 502CH 20525 to 20534 l Model name string 502DH to 503614 20535 to 20536 Vendor specific device 5037H to 5038H information 20537 to 20538 System area 5039H to 503AH
248. ng brackets 0 00 c ccc cece eens 48 AoA Boardistalato daa di flea ess ee hea as thet aoc aes 49 4 4 Settino ChannelNumbetS oia a wlnice havea eb ostn e Sane 50 4 5 Tests Before Wiring Standalone Tests of the Board 0 0 eee 51 AS Bus PES a ADS ote Gace ue IN A A ee elon ot 51 452 Memo estarei errota As DR 52 A53 Hardware tesoros rada 52 454 Selfoopbacktest ms rencor isbn tado Seana eek bo dead 53 a AN 223 teas E EN ane a ates aie 54 AGA Wiring Precautions tarta oh acd eee A a NANTE 54 46 2 Ethernet cable Connections asorr eanet ANE ee 56 Ar Teste Ater WII E is Sete Sel fe ee aegis ree A te 58 10 Ari Coop test AAA dette ede oe seen AA AA OA 58 AT 2 C AOS A O As th Edens ce ae eee ds Sine eee 60 4739 Communication testar Balen eee eee aes len RRE 61 CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS 63 SI o A 63 5 2 Cyel TRANSMISSION siena id A a A dia hawt ae 65 5 2 1 Data flow and link device assignment 0 0 cc ees 65 5 2 2 Link scan and link refresh 00 c cece ee eee eee nee e eens 68 523 Assurance of cyclic data Integridad seca 69 5 2 4 Input status of data link error station setting 0 0 0 cc ees T1 5 2 5 Cyclic transmission stop and restart naa aaaea eee eens 12 5 3 Transient Transmission a A hk eer teres Loe 13 5 3 1 Communication on the same network 0 00 0000 ee 13 5 3 2 Communication with different networks 0 0 0 0 cc a eee 74 54
249. ng screen is displayed Click the Allow or Yes button to start the utility User Account Control Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it before Program name CCIEFUTL exe CB CCIEFUTL exe Publisher Unknown Unidentified Publisher File origin Network drive Cancel I don t know where this program is from or what it s for Y Show details gt Allow Change when these notifications appear I trust this program 1 know where it s from or I ve used it before Y Details User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer For details on how to prevent this screen from being displayed refer to Page 261 Appendix 11 2 Exiting Exit CC IE Field Utility Operating procedure 1 7D Project gt Exit 94 CHAPTER 8 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 8 2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations This section explains the main frame basic screen of CC IE Field Utility that is displayed when it is started up 8 2 1 Main frame configuration The following shows a main frame configuration Screen display Title bar AAA IE Field Utility Unset project Network Parameter CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting Menu bar r Project Edit view Online Diagnostics Window Help Toolbar mr iDEA iDan Bi Fa PL Netwa CC IE Fi None lo Board Board 2 Boada Board 4 OOo o o channels PO meteros ff Totalstations
250. nged parameter locations To verify data in the board perform the board verification gt Page 126 Section 11 3 Screen display O Project gt Verify Verify Destination Project Workspace Folder Path Workspace Name Project Name Title Execute Cancel Operating procedure 1 Click the _2 _ button to set the verify destination project Item Description Verify Destination Project Display the path to the workspace of the verify destination Display the workspace name of the verify destination Display the project name of the verify destination Display the project title of the verify destination 2 Click the Execute button The verify result is displayed on the Verify Result screen E Verify Result Project Verify Parameter Source Project Name i Dro Destination Project Name p Source Data Name Destination Data Name Verify Result Mismatch in Number of Boards of CC IE Field Setting There were 1 parts not matched Unmatch Line 108 CHAPTER 10 SETTING PARAMETERS CHAPTER 10 SETTING PARAMETERS This chapter explains the parameter setting items and operations on the setting screens in CC IE Field Utility For writing set parameters to a board refer to 2 gt Page 125 Section 11 2 1 0 1 Parameter List The following table shows the list of CC Link IE Field Network parameters O Required A Set as required No setting Necessity of setting Ite
251. npack Compress and saves a project Unpack a compressed project Delete Delete an existing project Verify Verifying data of an open project and data of another project Display the recently used CC IE Field Utility project paths and opens the selected project Exit Exit CC IE Field Utility The latest file 1 to 4 Reference Page 101 Section 9 1 Page 102 Section 9 2 Page 107 Section 9 6 Page 103 Section 9 3 Page 105 Section 9 4 Page 107 Section 9 5 Page 108 Section 9 7 Page 94 Section 8 1 92 Edit Reference View Reference Network Parameter Toolbar Toolbar name Channel No Setting Read from Board Write to Board Verify Board Reset Operation Device Monitor Utility Board Diagnostics CC IE Field Diagnostics Set the network parameters Page 109 CHAPTER 10 Page 96 Section 8 2 2 Display hide the toolbar Reference Page 124 Section 11 1 Online Display change board channel numbers Read parameters from the board Page 125 Section 11 2 Write parameters to the board Verify parameters set to the board and parameters of open project Reset the board Start Device Monitor Utility Page 126 Section 11 3 Page 127 Section 11 4 Page 128 CHAPTER 12 Reference Page 142 Section 13 1 Page 144 Section 13 2 Diagnostics Diagnose the operating status of the board Diagnose the CC Link IE Field Network CHAPTER 7 OVERVIEW OF CC IE FIELD UTILITY Window Reference Casc
252. nsmission is stopped by System link stop SB0003 0 Normal 1 or higher Error definition in own station lt 7 Page 199 Section 16 9 Data link stop status SW0053 When System link stop SB0003 is turned OFF the stored error definition x entire system is cleared Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores the results when executing the temporary error invalid station setting 0 Normal swoos4 Omporary errorinvalid a artigar Abnormal i Page 199 Section 16 9 x station setting result i l gt O When Temporary error invalid request SB0010 is turned OFF the stored E error definition is cleared Stores the results when canceling the temporary error invalid station setting x Temporary error invalid 0 Normal sof SW0055 station setting cancel 1 or higher Abnormal lt 3 Page 199 Section 16 9 7 S result A When Temporary error invalid setting cancel request SB0011 is turned ha OFF the stored error definition is cleared el Stores the result when disabling reserved station function Z 0 Normal SWO0056 Result of reserved 1 or higher Abnormal lt 7 Page 199 Section 16 9 e T station function disable When Reserved station function disable request SB0012 is turned OFF the stored error definition is cleared Stores the result when reserved station function disable is undone 0 Normal SW0057 a of ias 1 or higher Abnormal gt Page 199 Section
253. nt transmission and then retry the operation D202H Send b tertaii e men the mode of the master station is ne High Speed Mode change it to Online Normal Mode and retry the operation e Check if the cables and switching hub are connected properly Read write address error in D203H e Correct the read write address at the request source and retry the operation transient data e Correct the network number at the request source and retry the operation Network No error in transient D204H e If the request source resides in another network check if the routing parameters data are correctly set and take corrective action Target station No error in D205H e Correct the target station number at the request source and retry the operation transient data e Correct the network number at the request source and retry the operation Network No error in transient D206H dele e If the request source resides in another network check if the routing parameters are correctly set and take corrective action e Correct the system configuration to reduce the number of relay stations to seven Incorrect number of relays D207H a or less specified in transient data e Check if the routing parameters are correctly set and take corrective action e Correct the network number at the request source and retry the operation Network No error in transient D208H e If the request source resides in another network check if the routing parameters
254. ntained at an occurrence of a data link error Point O Data link error in all stations when starting a personal computer Errors occur in all stations when a personal computer is started This is because the line between P1 and P2 of CC Link IE Field Network board is disconnected under the following conditions e The power of the personal computer is turned OFF The line becomes in a conduction state when the power is turned ON e A reconnection is in progress when starting a board driver As a result the following reconnection which causes an error in all station occurs e A reconnection of CC Link IE Field Network board installed in a personal computer e A reconnection of station which is located beyond the CC Link IE Field Network board from the point of the master station If multiple boards are installed in a single personal computer this symptom occurs for the same number of times as the number of installed boards For a measure to above error set the Network Operation Setting to maintain inputs from data link error station when outputs need to be maintained at an occurrence of a data link error lt gt Page 116 Section 10 2 3 30 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION e Connected station numbers Connected station numbers should not be duplicated Data link may be stopped when the station number is xX Duplication xX Station No 0 Station No 1 Station No 1 duplicated Data link may stop f
255. ntrol Run all administrators in Admin Appr Enabled User Account Control Switch to the secure desktop when pr Enabled ie User Account Control Virtualize file and registry write failure Enabled Local Security Setting Explain 3 User Account Control Behavior of the elevation prompt for T administrators in Admin Approval Mode Blevate without prompting Prompt for credentials on the secure desktop Prompt for consent on the secure desktop Prompt for credentials Prompt for consent Prompt for consent for non Windows binaries Setting completed 7 APPENDIX Select User Account Control Behavior of the elevation prompt for administrators in Admin Approval Mode Prompt for consent 8 Select Elevate without prompting on the lt lt Local Security Setting gt gt tab and click the 0k button 267 U9ADIA 104 SPOYJ N Z LL XIpuaddy oBbessayy HulueM SMOPUIM LL xipueddy obessow Bululem Bul Appendix 1 2Behavior When Personal Computer Enters Power Save Mode or Fast Startup CC Link IE Field Network board does not support the power save mode standby hibernate sleep and fast startup The following explains the behavior of the personal computer when the personal computer enters each mode Appendix 12 1 Behavior when the personal computer enters the power save mode standby hibernate 1 Target operating system The following operating systems h
256. nued by path switching even though a communication error occurs iii O Conditions for continued access Operation mode Backup mode Separate mode Redundant CPU specification Control system Standby system System A System B Note however that if a tracking error had already occurred at a start of communication access to the control system is not continued by path switching even if tracking is recovered after that 4 Includes the status in which either Redundant CPU is powered OFF or reset 214 APPENDIX b Checking method of path switching occurrence When the system is communicating with the redundant system specified whether communication is continued by path switching due to communication error occurrence can be estimated Create a program that monitors the following special relay and special registers to check the occurrence of path switching lt Special relay and special registers to be monitored and estimated possibility of path switching gt SM1600 D1590 2 SD1690 2 Possibility of path switching Reference Since a system switching request from the network module O ee OFF Either one is other than 0 ve in this section was detected path switching may have been executed Figure 1 Since another system error occurred path switching may ade on Ve ON in this section have been executed Figure 2 Since another system error occurred or a system switching Page 216 4 c in thi ii ON Either one is other
257. o isi 182 E i Cancel Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Channel No Current Value Display current channel numbers of each board Display LED status of each board The status is displayed as shown below according to the current channel number while opening the Channel No Setting screen EEO lt 181 gt lt 182 gt lt 183 gt lt 184 gt mo BE ME ME Channel No Setting Value Set the channel number 2 Clickthe a button Channel No Setting Value is set to the board Point 181 is set for the board channel number as a factory default When using two or more boards in a single personal computer set channel numbers not to overlap 124 CHAPTER 11 OPERATING BOARD ONLINE 11 2 Writing Reading Parameters to from Board This section explains methods for writing project parameter settings to the board and reading current board parameter settings to the project Operating procedure 1 XX Online gt Read from Board Write to Board O Channel numbers Parameter settings to be written to the board are reflected to the board of the corresponding channel number Change board channel numbers on the Channel No Setting screen L gt Page 124 Section 11 1 Board 4 Network Type CC IE Field Master Station w CC IE Field Local Station w None y Channel No Network No 1 Total Stations As Station No Mode Online Normal Mode x Network Configuration
258. o 20575 5059H to 505FH 3 Other station information station number 2 to 120 Address 20576 to 24383 5060H to 5F3FH The information for station number 2 to 120 is stored in the same order as the information for other station uoewoyzu UOINe s 194 O yz xipuaddy sessalppy JOWIN yng JO sjielaq z XIpuaddy network card information station number 1 and other station controller information station number 1 223 Appendix 3 Link Special Relay SB List A link special relay SB is turned ON OFF depending on various factors at data link Any error status of the data link can be confirmed by using and monitoring it in the program 1 Application of the link special relay SB By using link special relays SB the status of the CC Link IE Field Network can be checked 2 Ranges of areas that are turned ON OFF by users and by the system The following is a range when the link special relays SB are assigned from SB0000 to SBO1FF e Range turned ON OFF by users SB0000 to SB001F e Range turned ON OFF by the system SB0020 to SBO1FF 3 Link Special Relay SB List A list of link special relays SB when they are assigned from SB0000 to SBO1FF is described on the following pages Point e Do not turn ON or OFF areas whose numbers are not on the link special relay SB list Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system 224 APPENDIX Availability Number Description Master Local st
259. of the master station is a Slave station specified as a reserved station In Network Configuration Setting of the master station is RX RY Setting or RWw RWr Setting for slave stations configured Do the station numbers set in Network Configuration Setting of the master station match those set for corresponding slave stations Do the station types set in Network Configuration Setting of the master station match those set for the connected slave stations Is the station number of CC Link IE Field Network board duplicated with the station number of other station Is the board hardware operating normally Corrective action If the D LINK LED is flashing or OFF perform the troubleshooting Page 194 Section 16 7 11 2 Cancel the reserved station setting of the slave station E Page 169 Section 16 2 2 Set RX RY or RWw RWr data for each slave station within the allowable range L Page 169 Section 16 2 2 Correct the station number s Correct the station types set in Network Configuration Setting of the master station Change the duplicated station number Perform the board test Page 191 Section 16 7 10 1 If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to K Page 198 Section 16 8 For the troubleshooting for the specific symptoms refer to 1 in this section 1 An unexpected value is set to the specific link device Check the following items Item Is there a link error
260. ol Program name Setup exe Publisher Unknown File origin Hard drive on this computer vV Show details Yes No Change when these notifications appear User Account Control screen in which the password is required to be entered System stand by screen System hibernate screen For the error code refer to the following section gt Page 199 Section 16 9 Corrective action This screen is displayed when user account control is enabled Click Allow or the xes button For the method for disabling the screen refer to K Page 261 Appendix 11 e This screen is displayed when the log on user does not have administrator authority Log on as a user with administrator authority The power save mode stand by hibernate is not supported for CC Link IE Field Network board e Configure the settings of the Power Options in the control panel to avoid the computer from activating the power save mode Aistand by hibernate e Check the setting for when the computer s power button is pressed and the settings of the uninterruptible power supply system UPS For the screen displayed at installation refer to the following section gt Page 170 Section 16 2 3 For the screens of the operating system contact the operating system manufacturer For the screens on which the user program is displayed check the user program If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to K Page 198 Section 16 8
261. on 16 6 2 e Perform the troubleshooting for when the cyclic transmission cannot be performed at own station Page 183 Section 16 6 1 e Perform the troubleshooting for when the cyclic transmission cannot be performed at station in which data link error is occurring Page 183 Section 16 6 1 e Check the Windows event viewer L gt Page 189 Section 16 7 7 e Refer to the CPU module manual regarding the CPU of the station in which a CPU Stop error Continuation error is occurring perform the troubleshooting of the CPU module For link special relays SB refer to lt gt Page 224 Appendix 3 and for link special registers SW refer to L gt Page 236 Appendix 4 16 7 14 Checking communication status with monitoring access target device Monitor the link device and access target device with Device Monitor Utility Page 139 Section 12 2 Check whether the system is performing as set on the parameters and programs by checking the performance of link poyjau Buloy 2 91 device communication or transient transmission reception Check An error message is displayed Is an unexpected value set to the link device Is the device able to be written with Device Monitor Utility Corrective action e Take corrective action following the message e Check the error code and perform the corrective action described in the error code list Page 199 Section 16 9 e Take corrective action for when an unexpec
262. on group policies Public Key Policies gt E Application Control Policies E Software Restriction Policies EN gt 8 IP Security Policies on Local Compute 3 Application Control Policies Application Control Policies b ES Advanced Audit Policy Configuration 3 IP Security Policies on Local Computer Internet Protocol Security IPsec Administratio E Advanced Audit Policy Configuration Advanced Audit Policy Configuration 6 Select Security Options File Action View Help es Xi amp Security Settings Name Description 2 accom pes E Audit Policy Audit Policy gt olicies A A s A User Rights Assig nt User Rights Assignment gt ES Windows Firewall with Advanced Sec fa c a z ai Network List Manager Policies gt Public Key Policies gt El Software Restriction Policies gt ES Application Control Policies b amp IP Security Policies on Local Compute b D Advanced Audit Policy Configuration y To the next page 266 From the previous page y File Action View Help cs 2X2 a Security Settings Ga Account Policies a 3 Local Policies E Audit Policy A User Rights Assignment T Security Options E Windows Firewall with Advanced Sec ES Network List Manager Policies Public Key Policies Software Restriction Policies Application Control Policies 3 IP Security Policies on Local Compute Advanced Audit Po
263. on number and network number of the network module which is received the request from the own station The following example specifies the station number 1 of the network number 1 The station number 5 of the network number 2 cannot be specified Own station Target station Station Station Station No 0 No 1 No 5 Network No 1 Station Station No 3 No 2 Station No 1 Specify station No 1 as the target station Station No 5 cannot be specified Tf UOHHOUNA AOAY GNAS VS 78 a Execution type Two execution types with arrival confirmation and without arrival confirmation are available for the SEND function When sending data with without arrival confirmation execution type All stations and Group numbers can be specified as target stations besides the station number Without arrival confirmation When the target station is on the same network The process is completed when data is sent from the own station a Target station Completed e Without arrival confirmation When the target station is on another network The process is completed when data arrives at the relay station on the same network Completed e With arrival confirmation The process is completed when data is stored in the target station ETE Target station Completed Completed When Without arrival confirmation is specified the result is regarded as normal on the own station even if the sending to the target
264. on the module before turning it on for operation Failure to do so may result in electric shock 2 Handling Place the Ethernet cable in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the personal computer Such foreign matter may cause a fire failure or malfunction Do not install the communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm 3 94 in or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Securely plug the communication cable to the connector of the board Then check for any incomplete connection Poor contact may cause an erroneous input or output Do not touch the core of the cable side or module side connector and protect it from dirt or dust If oil from your hand dirt or dust is attached to the core it can increase transmission loss arising a problem in data link Attach a connector cover to a connector which is not connected to an Ethernet cable to prevent foreign matter such as dirt or dust 3 Precautions for Ethernet cable e Check the following e Is any Ethernet cable disconnected e Does any Ethernet cable short e Are the connectors securely connected e Do not use Ethernet cables with broken latches Doing so may cause the cable to unplug or malfunction e
265. onfiguration display Network diagnostics of CC Link IE Field Utility Check the network circuit status and parameter setting status of Loop test Page 58 Section 4 7 1 each station CC Link IE Field Cable test Check the connection status of the Ethernet cable Page 60 Section 4 7 2 Network a Check whether the communication path for transient transmission Communication test oe Page 61 Section 4 7 3 diagnostics from the own station to the target station is correct The history of events that occurred in the own station and on the The network configuration can be checked by the CC Link IE Field Page 144 Section 13 2 network is displayed For the master station the event history of the Page 159 Section entire network can be displayed and so it can be used for 13 2 6 troubleshooting at network start up Network event history Page 82 Section 5 5 Page 161 Section 13 2 7 Reserved station Reserved stations can be temporarily disabled without changing temporary disablement parameters Other b Modified functions The following are the functions modified in the CC Link IE Field Network board Function Notes during replacement When the CC Link IE Field Network is connected in a line topology stations after the disconnected station become data link error stations To prevent disconnection of normal stations connect the CC Link IE Field Network in a star topology 2 gt Page 26 Section 2 2 Standby ma
266. ons other than local stations The data of all slave stations are also stored in the local stations in the same way as the master station s e e Station number O i q Station number 2 gt Station number 3 q I i I II II I Bates Master station i i T Local station Board I i i i I I I U RX RWr i RX RWr i RX RWr l ser I II II I program Station o ee i Send range a a Jawan NAAA i Station I l l from station 1 RX RW A i I i l number 1 i rs i I i Station i j i pene range 1 i ALO TETI ALO TETTI LL y from station MD function umber 2 Y i i l i I i Station i i i I TA II AS HENNE ARENA I i l i I I p i Link refresh I E I 1 RY RWw I l Send range 7 Driver to station AMA Station number 1 number 1 Send range i i to station 1 Send range i I 1 to station I number 3 E Area for sending to other stations 4 Setting method The link devices can be assigned in Network Configuration Setting lt 1 gt Page 112 Section 10 2 2 UOISSIUISUBI MID ZG juauwubisse 9149p Yul pue mol BEG 1208 6 52 2 Link scan and link refresh Link scan is executed asynchronously with the link refresh which is executed by the CC Link IE Field Network board driver Link refresh time Setting time Setting time Setting time Setting time Link refresh Link refresh Link refresh Link scan 1 Setting me
267. ontain a switching hub e When not using the loopback function Disconnect an Ethernet cable connected to any stations on the network either PORT1 or PORT2 The network topology will become a line topology and data link will start e When using the loopback function Enable the loopback function and rewrite the network parameter L gt Page 85 Section 5 8 e The system contains a switching hub 1 Check if the loopback function setting is correctly configured Page 85 Section 5 8 If incorrect correct the network parameter and rewrite it When data link starts over the network the action is successful 2 Disconnect one Ethernet cable connected to the switching hub and power off and then on the hub Repeat this operation until data link starts over the network 3 When data link starts over the network check the network configuration by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics gt Page 144 Section 13 2 Change the duplicated station number Perform the board test gt Page 191 Section 16 7 10 1 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 L ERR LED L ER LED is turned ON L ERR LED is an LED which does not exist on the board Check the status with the LED display on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen 2 gt Page 153 Section 13 2 2 7 This indicates a occurrence of received data error or loop error The L ER LED of the port which detected the error is turned ON The error detail can be checked with t
268. ontrol is enabled the following Ela Local Security Policy 2010 03 17 5 44 Shortcut KB Performance Monitor 2009 07 14 13 41 Shortcut 2 KB i Terea l T screen appears Click the or Yes button System Configuration 2009 07 14 13 41 Shortcut 2KB Task Scheduler 2009 07 14 13 42 Shortcut 2KB P Windows Firewall with Advanced Security 2009 07 14 13 41 Shortcut 2KB Windows Memory Diagnostic 2009 07 14 13 41 Shortcut 2KB Windows PowerShell Modules 2009 07 14 13 52 Shortcut 3 KB Tf you started this action continue Microsoft Management Console Microsoft Windows Details Continue Cancel Program name Microsoft Management Console Verified publisher Microsoft Windows Y Show details Ce Le Change when these notifications appear Local Security Policy Date modified 2010 03 17 5 44 Date created 2010 03 17 5 44 Shortcut Size 1 21 KB User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer 5 e gt AX e B Security Settings Name Description EA Account Policies GB Account Policies Password and account lockout policies gt EA Local Policies gt Windows Firewall with Advanced Sec ES Network List Manager Policies b B Public Key Policies b El Software Restriction Policies Select Local Policies Windows Firewall with Advanced Security Windows Firewall with Advanced Security E Network List Manager Policies Network name icon and locati
269. operty rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual O 2011 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION 282 Warranty Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs
270. or e The board does not perform loopback unnecessary LINK e Linkup in progress L ER LED e The module received abnormal data Page 195 3 in this e The board is performing loopback section LINK LED i Page 195 4 in this LINK OFF Linkdown in progress E section If the LED does not turn ON synchronized with the utility display or execution status of the board the LED failure may occurred In this case replace the board 192 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 MODE LED is turned OFF or flashing MODE LED is an LED which does not exist on the board Check the status with the LED display on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen 2 gt Page 153 Section 13 2 2 7 When the MODE LED is turned OFF it is in the offline mode When the MODE LED is flashing it is in the test mode Check Corrective action Is the mode set to the online mode Change the mode to the online mode _ 3 Page 110 Section 10 2 Is the hardware of the board operating normally Perform the board test gt Page 191 Section 16 7 10 1 poyjau Buloy 2 91 snje3s 4371 Bumoayo L49 193 2 D LINK LED is turned OFF or flashing D LINK LED is an LED which does not exist on the board Check the status with the LED display on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen gt Page 153 Section 13 2 2 7 When the D LINK LED is turned OFF both cyclic transmission and transient transmission of the board are stopped When the D LINK LED i
271. or exchanging data between the CC Link IE Field Network board and the master local module The content of the buffer memory returns to the default initial values when the power is turned off or the CC Link IE Field Network board is reset Address Decimal Hexadecimal O to 1023 0 to 3FFH 1024 to 2047 400H to 7FFH 2048 to 10239 800H to 27FFH 10240 to 18431 2800H to 47FFH 18432 to 18463 4800H to 481FH 18464 to 18975 4820H to 4A1FH 18976 to 19455 4A20H to 4BFFH 19456 4C00H 19457 4C01H to 19694 4CEEn 19695 4CEFH 19696 to 19711 4CFOH to 4CFFH 19712 4D00n 19713 4D01H to 19950 4DEEH 19951 4DEFH 19952 to 19967 4DFOH to 4DFFH 40 Initial f Read write Refer to value Remote output RY Read write Remote register RWw inkedevieearea Remote register RWr Page ae Appendix 2 1 e 18432 to 18433 for read and write e 18434 to 18463 for read only e 18464 to 18495 for read and write e 18496 to 18975 for read only Link special relay SB Link special register SW System area S Saton noit Rxofset No 1 RX offset Station No 1 RX size Page 220 Read Appendix 2 2 1 Staton No 120 RX ofset No 120 RX offset Saton No 120RXsze No 120 RX Saton No 120RXsze Semara area z RX offset size information Saton noit RY ofset No 1 RY offset Station No 1 RY size Page 220 Appendix 2 2 2 RY offset size i
272. or precautions when using MELSEC data link library refer to the following manual LCTIMELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual juawuoJnuy Bunelado sz 3 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter explains general and performance specifications of CC Link IE Field Network board 3 1 General Specifications General specifications of CC Link IE Field Network board are shown below Item Specification Operating ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Storage ambient temperature 25 to 75 C Operating ambient humidity 5 to 95 RH non condensing Storage ambient humidity Under intermittent vibration Constant Frequency Half amplitude Sweep count acceleration 9 8 m s j j each in X Y Z Vibration resistance JIS B 3502 and IEC Irections 61131 2 Under continuous vibration Constant Frequency Half amplitude Sweep count acceleration 34t0150Hz aom Shock resistance Compliant with JIS B 3502 and IEC 61131 2 147 m s 3 times each in X Y Z directions Operating atomosphere No corrosive gases Operating altitude O to 2000 m Installation location Inside a control panel Overvoltage category 7 Il or less Pollution degree 2 or less 4 Do not use or store the board under the environment where the atmospheric pressure is higher than the one at the altitude of O m Doing so may cause a malfunction 2 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the publ
273. ore between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Installation Precautions WARNING O Turn off the power for the system in all phases before installing the board to or removing it from the personal computer Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the board to fail or malfunction O Do not touch any connectors while power is on Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunction NCAUTION Use the board in an environment that meets the general specifications in this manual Failure to do so may result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to or deterioration of the product Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the board Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the board Do not disassemble or modify the board Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire Fix the board by tighten the board fixing screws within the specified torque range Undertightening may cause drop of the component or wire short circuit or malfunction Overtightening may damage the screw and or board resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction For the tightening torque of the board fixing screws refer to the manual supplied with the personal computer Before handling the board touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the board to fail or malfunction Install th
274. ork configuration and status of each station are displayed When the status of each station is not displayed check if master stations or station numbers are not overlapped Screen display 1 2 rae 5 Connected St 4 Branch Inteligent 7 Display contents 1 Connected Station Indicate a station connected to the utility own station Display a network type and station number is displayed when a station number has not been set When the background of the characters is colored setting such as reserved station specification has been configured to the relevant station 3 Display a module type and station status 4 Display a port to which an Ethernet cable is connected 5 A branch of star topology configured by using a network device such as a hub a Icon By clicking an icon the station is set as a selected station and details are displayed in Selected Station 2 Network type Station No Communication Status Monitor A station with an error such as master station overlap or station number overlap details are not displayed as a selected station even by clicking the icon In such case execute the board diagnostics on the error station and determine the error cause When the error station is a module determine the error cause using the system monitor function of GX Works2 Use the right and left arrow keys to move the focus and press the or key to confirm the selected station The same function
275. ormation link with the connected station Target stations of the link start stop operation can be selected in Selected Status Select Link Start Link Stop To forcibly start the data link of a station which has been stopped by another station or a special relay special register check Forced Link Start 2 Click the Execute button The link start stop is executed for all selected stations at once When the process is completed Selected Status are cleared and the contents of Link Status are updated Link Start Stop Executing Contents Screen button es Select All button Selects all stations displayed in the list e Cancel All Selections button Cancels the selection status of all stations selected in the list 158 CHAPTER 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13 2 6 Network event history Display a list of event history occurred on the own station and on the network Screen display KO Diagnostics gt CC IE Field Diagnostics 2 gt CC IE Field Diagnostics screen lt gt Network Event History button Network Event History Network Event History Collection Target Whole Network Network No 1 Network Event History List Detailed Information 2011 01 07 14 57 30 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Error Error code of the own station ia 2011 01 07 14 56 11 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Data link status 2011 01 07 14 56 11 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt
276. ot detected as a data link faulty station However stations subsequent to the disconnected station are detected as a data link faulty station Error invalid station Not detected as a data link faulty station Detected as a data link faulty station O Setting in the Network status on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen The temporary error invalid station setting restoration can be performed from the network configuration of Network Status on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen The menu is displayed by right clicking the target station lt Page 150 Section 13 2 2 5 a 162 CHAPTER 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS Point Parameter setting The network parameter does not reflect temporary error invalid station setting Resetting the master station or powering off the system Temporary error invalid station setting is reset and the slave station returns to the status set by the master station s network parameter Disconnecting a station for which temporary error invalid station setting has been configured If the master station is reset the master station and local stations will differ in the following e ERR LED status e Temporary error invalid station setting SWOOEO to SWO00E7 The difference can be corrected by the following procedure 1 Reconnect the disconnected station 2 Configure temporary error invalid station setting and then cancel the setting 163 sJOJJ9 UO e s BJOUBI ajqesiq e qe
277. oubleshooting on the disconnected station for when D LINK LED is OFF or flashing Page 194 Section 16 7 11 2 Total stations set for network parameter of the master station is different from the number of slave stations connected to the Correct Total stations to match with the number of slave stations network If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to L gt Page 198 Section 16 8 180 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 5 2 User program cannot be accessed to CPU module other than QCPU The 64 bit version user program cannot be accessed to CPU module other than QCPU Q mode Use 32 bit version user program 16 5 3 Communication cannot be performed occasionally when executing user program When the communication cannot be performed occasionally when executing a user program check the following items Item Corrective action Check the returned value of the communication function Ist he error code returned to the user program Page 199 Section 16 9 Check the network status with the utility Page 196 Section 16 7 12 Check if the same error occurs when adding the station in order next to Can the network error be monitored with utility the existing station for the system configuration which is configured only by a master station and own station Does the same error occur when adding the station to the ere If the same error occurred check the added station i l e Checking installat
278. ower is on Doing so may result in a malfunction CAUTION O Thoroughly read the manual and ensure the safety before performing program modification during operation forced output operation such as RUN STOP and PAUSE An improper operation will result in mechanical damage or accidents O Do not disassemble or modify the boards Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire O Fix the board by tighten the board fixing screws within the specified torque range Undertightening may cause drop of the component or wire short circuit or malfunction Overtightening may damage the screw and or board resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction For the tightening torque of the board fixing screws refer to the manual supplied with the personal computer O Before handling the board touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the board to fail or malfunction O The board is included in an antistatic envelope When storing or transporting it be sure to put it in the antistatic envelope Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction O The microprocessor built in the board will reach a high temperature during operation Do not touch it directly when replacing the board Doing so may result in a failure malfunction or injury Disposal Precautions CAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste
279. perating system Utility does not start up y E e Page 176 Section 16 3 2 The utility does not start up by clicking the icon The screen or operation is The utility screen is not displayed normally Bi PS Page 176 Section 16 3 3 abnormal The utility cannot be operated The corrective action displayed on An unexpected screen is displayed i i e Page 177 Section 16 3 4 the screen is not effective The corrective action displayed on the screen is not effective Mouse or keyboard operates slowly Personal computer operates Other application operates slowly slowly CPU utilization of personal computer is high Operation of sound function is unstable e Page 178 Section 16 3 5 3 Board and driver Error Description Reference A hardware failure or a board WDT error has occurred RUN LED is OFF A driver WDT error occurred RUN LED is flashing and RD LED is ON The driver cannot communicate with the board Driver does not activate e Page 179 Section 16 4 3 RUN LED is OFF NA d PCI bus PCI Express bus error occurred tao Sedona n bus error occurre A A RUN LED is flashing and SD LED is ON e Page 178 Section 16 4 1 An WDT error occurred e Page 179 Section 16 4 2 167 s jdwex4 10113 91 4 Network access Error An error occurred in the network data link An error occurred while accessing the device via a network 168 Description Reference The co
280. perature within the specified range by taking range action such as removing heat source Check the wire and cable lengths and grounding condition of each Is there any noise affecting the system device and take measures against noise 237 Page 43 CHAPTER 4 16 7 2 Check the board installation Check the board for an abnormal installation Check Corrective action e Remove the board and reinstall it Is the board properly installed e Change the board installation position e Fix the board firmly with screws e Remove the board which exceeds the maximum number of Is the applicable number of boards installed applicable boards 16 7 3 Checking cables and wiring Check if there is an error on the cable or hub disconnected connectors or improper wiring Check Corrective action Replace the cable with the 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet cable Is the 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet cable used Page 33 Section 2 4 1 Is the station to station distance 100m or less Change the station to station distance to 100m or less Does the cabling condition bend radius meet the Refer to the manual for the Ethernet cable and correct the bend specification radius Is any Ethernet cable disconnected Replace the Ethernet cable e Check if the 1000BASE T compliant switching hub is used L gt Page 33 Section 2 4 2 e Power off and then on the switching hub e Replace the switching hub Is the switching hub normal 186
281. power lines and signal lines 1kHz 10Vrms EN61000 4 8 Power frequency magnetic The product is immersed in the ay 50 60Hz 30A m i me q magnetic field of an induction coil field immunity e 0 0 5 period starting at zero EN61000 4 11 crossing i y Power voltage is momentarily Voltage dips and interruption eee e 0 250 300 period 50 60Hz immunity cad e 40 10 12 period 50 60Hz e 70 25 30 period 50 60Hz 1 The tests were conducted installed in a control panel 398 1 DIN 34 yum JduIO9 O seunseay y XIpuaddy SIAIL9O3Y9 0 ADVLIOA MOT ANY OW y xipueddy 275 2 Installation in a control panel The installation in the control board ensures safety as well as effective shielding of personal computer emitted electromagnetic noise a Control panel e Use a conductive control panel e Mask off the area used for grounding when securing the top or bottom plate to the control panel using bolts e To ensure electrical contact between the inner plate and the control panel mask off the bolt installation areas of an inner plate so that conductivity can be ensured in the largest possible area e Ground the control panel with a thick ground cable so that low impedance can be ensured even at high frequencies e Keep the diameter of the holes on the control panel to 10cm or less If the diameter is larger than 10cm electromagnetic wave may be emitted In addition because electromagnetic wave leaks through a cl
282. procedure 1 7D Project gt Save The existing project data are overwritten CHAPTER 9 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9 4 Saving Projects with Compression and Unpacking Projects This section explains the methods for saving projects with compression and unpacking projects saved with compression This function gives easier project data passes This function is not compatible with commercially available file compression and decompression tools 1 Saving projects with compression Save a desired project with compression Screen display Project gt Compress Unpack gt Compress Compress Project to be Compressed Workspace Folder Path L Documents and Settings XP My Documents Workspace2 Browse Workspace Project List E It returns to the workspace list Project fProjectt ay Compress Destination Setting Compressed File Name L Documents and Settings XP My Documents Workspace2 Project1 ifz Browse cue Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Project to be Compressed Enter the folder drive path where the workspace is saved Workspace Folder Path The folder can be selected in the Browse For Folder screen by clicking the Bose button Workspace Project List Select a workspace and a project Workspace Name Display the selected workspace name Project Name Display the selected project name Compress Destination Setting
283. r 1 f Link W j EL x Station number 2 Personal computer Local station Board Master station Board RX RWr RX RWr MD function Link refresh v e Station number 1 Driver e y o Link refresh A 9 os A e A e e e e e e e e e e e i eee E i i ee U L Area for sending to other stations e Output from the master station The status data of the user program are stored in the driver by MD function The status data of the driver are stored in the link devices RY and RWw of the master station board by link refresh The status data of the link device RY RWw of the master station is stored in the link device RX RWr of the local station by link scan The status data of the link device RX RWr of the local station board is stored in the driver e Input from the local station The status data of the driver is stored in the own station send range of the link device RY RWw of the local station board by link refresh The status data of the link devices RX and RWr of the local station are stored in the link devices RX RWr of the master station by link scan The status data of the link devices RX RWr of the master station board are stored in the driver by link refresh The status of driver are stored in the user program by MD function CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS 3 Coexistence of local stations and the other slave stati
284. r 3 Link refresh RY RWw Station number 1 RY RWw Station number 2 Driver RY RWw Station number 3 eo ww s es s s eks s s s s 2 2s s s Ss Ps eee eee l Cyclic Se a ee aa transmission stopped nea a 1 Setting method Cyclic transmission stop and restart are operated on the Link Start Stop screen lt gt Page 158 Section 13 2 5 Point O The link start stop is not available in loop test mode O When the board is reset or the system is powered off and then on Even if cyclic transmission was stopped by link stop it will be restarted by resetting the board or powering off and then on the system O Station where link start cannot be performed Link start cannot be performed in the following cases e Station where cyclic transmission was stopped due to an error e Station where link was stopped by a command from another station Station where link was stopped by link special relay SB or link special register SW 1 Selecting Forced Link Start will start the link Cyclic transmission can be started and stopped with link special relay SB and link special register SW gt Page 224 Appendix 3 Page 236 Appendix 4 CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS 5 3 Transient Transmission This function allows communication with other stations using the MELSEC data link library function Communication is also possible with different networks 5 3 1 Communica
285. r can be selected in the Browse For Folder screen by clicking the Browse button Select a workspace Workspace Project List j i The display is switched to the project list by double clicking Workspace Workspace Name Enter the workspace name Project Name Enter the project name Title Enter the title of the project 2 Clickthe _ 5 button The project is saved in the specified folder under the specified workspace name project name and title 103 104 Point O Workspace A workspace is a folder of CC IE Field Utility dedicated to manage multiple projects under the same name Do not change the workspace configuration using an application such as Windows Explorer Saving projects in an existing destination When saving a project in an existing destination workspace or project the destination folder can be selected from the Workspace Project List Number of characters used for workspace name project name and title Enter each workspace name project name and title within 128 characters Note however that the total number of characters used for the workspace folder path workspace name and project name should not exceed 150 characters Network drive display on the Browse For Folder screen When the network drive display is not displayed log on to Windows as a user who has an access authority to the assigned folder 2 Saving projects Overwrite and save the project being edited Operating
286. r in all stations and data link cannot be performed e Connecting both PORT1 and PORT2 to the switching hub Cannot connect both Ethernet ports to the switching hub CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION c Ring topology To configure a network in ring topology set Use for Loopback Function Setting in the Network Parameter screen for the master station lt _ gt Page 114 Section 10 2 2 1 When a module is used for the master station check if the module version supports the loopback function MELSEC Q CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual Point O Configuring a network in ring topology using a switching hub If a network is configured in ring topology through the two ports of the switching hub the following problems may arise Therefore do not use a switching hub for ring topology e Loopback cannot be detected if an Ethernet cable is disconnected e f a station is disconnected due to failure or power off data link will stop Xx Switching hub There is an offline mode station on a network configured in ring topology In the following cases the master station or the station connected to the offline mode station cannot detect loopback e Either of the Ethernet cables connected to the offline mode station is disconnected NO Master station Station in Offline mode N 0 2 OD Z E O gt L No loopback is No loopback is A detected detected 3 A station connected to the offline mod
287. r system high load 1 Driver WDT settings For the setting methods refer to the following section K Page 119 Section 10 2 5 The driver WDT function is set to invalid as a default 2 When the driver WDT error has occurred The following shows the operation when driver WDT error has occurred a CC Link IE Field Network board and the driver stop communication and are disconnected from the network in order to avoid an erroneous output When the Driver WDT function confirmed the CC Link IE Field Network board in which a driver WDT error is occurred from other station a CPU stop error occurs b RUN LED flicks and RD LED turns ON on the CC Link IE Field Network board c 28158 9202H Driver WDT error occurs when accessing CC Link IE Field Network board from the application program in which the CC IE Field Utility and MELSEC data link library function are used Point e When the multiple applications in which MELSEC data link library is used are executed driver WDT error is returned to all the programs However only the CC Link IE Field Network board in which the driver WDT error has occurred is recognized as an error station on the network When using driver WDT function set the monitoring timer considering the margin of the personal computer load e For the troubleshooting refer to the following chapter gt Page 166 CHAPTER 16 86 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES CHAPTER 6 INSTALLING A
288. r term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 283 Microsoft Windows Windows XP Windows Vista Windows Server Visual Basic Visual C Visual Studio are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countri
289. r the control block of the dedicated instruction Correct the value and then retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Check the transient data at the request source and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Another CC Link dedicated instruction is in execution Retry it after a little while e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e The REMFR REMTO instruction is not available for stations other than master and local stations Modify the program so that the REMFR REMTO instruction will not be used e The REMTO instruction is not available for local stations The REMTO instruction must be executed on the master station e Parameter setting using the CCPASET instruction is not available for local stations It must be executed to the master station e Correct the number of total slave stations in the control data and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Constant link scan time setting error CCPASET D263H D264H D265H D266H D267H D
290. range 0 to 120 sjajaweJed Bunnoy Z OL J9J9ueJeg YIOMION Buinas ZOL Condition Setting of Relay Target Network 2 Clickthe End button Screen button Set whether MELSECNET 10 network is used for routing the network Clear button Clears all settings i check button Checks whether the settings are correct 121 1 Target relay network For a relay station set in the routing parameter set a relay station of the own network which is routed by the transient transmission Ex A setting to perform transient transmission to network number O To go to network No station No of its own network No B Target Network Relay Network Relay Station Mo Station that needs 1 routing parameters 1 The stations which routing parameter settings are not supported such as head modules do not need to be set The communication with other networks is made depending on the routing parameters set to the master station Point O Transient transmission range Communications can be made with stations on up to the eighth network the number of relay stations 7 To check whether routing parameters have been correctly set and transient transmission will be successfully performed perform a communication test in CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics lt _ gt Page 61 Section 4 7 3 On arelay station in the multiple CPU system when different control CPUs are set for the network modules Set the sa
291. rd Page 52 Section 4 5 3 Check the communication circuit of the transmission system of the Self loopback test l l Page 53 Section 4 5 4 CC Link IE Field Network board Check the network circuit status and parameter setting status of Own network Loop test ab Page 58 Section 4 7 1 diagnostics Cable test Check the connection status of the Ethernet cable Page 60 Section 4 7 2 Other hes Check whether the communication path for transient transmission network Communication test A Page 61 Section 4 7 3 from the own station to the target station is correct diagnostics 5 Other functions Function Description Reference The reserved stations are included in the number of stations that will be connected to the network in the future without actually connecting Reserved station specification Page 75 Section 5 4 Page 112 Section 10 2 2 Page 161 Section 13 2 7 them Reserved stations are not detected as faulty stations even though they are not actually connected l Reserved station specification can be temporarily canceled without Reserved station function disable changing the parameters Prevent the master station from detecting a slave station as a faulty Page 83 Section 5 6 Page 112 Section 10 2 2 Page 162 Section 13 2 8 Error invalid station and temporary station even if the slave station is disconnected during data link This error invalid station setting can be used when replacing a sla
292. rd mdinit Refresh the programmable controller device address BEEE Batch write devices Send data SEND function RO Batch read devices Receive data RECV function mdRandW Write devices randomly mdRandR Read devices randomly mdDevsSet Set a bit device mdDevRst Reset a bit device 1 A function in which the access range is extended according to the extension of the device points at the access target It is accessible to all device numbers Use extended functions when creating a new program Point O Details on MELSEC data link library For details on the functions refer to the following manual MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual CHAPTER 15 PROGRAMMING CHAPTER 15PROGRAMMING This chapter explains CC Link IE Field Network programming 15 1 Precautions on Programming This section explains precautions for creating CC Link IE Field Network programs 1 Cyclic transmission programs For cyclic transmission programs interlock with the following link special relay SB and link special register SW C gt Page 224 Appendix 3 Page 236 Appendix 4 e Data link status own station SB0O049 e Data link status each station SWOOBO to SW00B7 2 Transient transmission programs For transient transmission programs interlock with the following link special relay SB and link special register SW L gt Page 224 Appendix 3 Page 236 Appendix 4 e Baton pass status own station SB0047 e Baton pass st
293. red by the Purchaser or End User e Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region 1 2 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE Interlink transfer and routing functions CC Link IE Field Network board cannot be used as a relay station for the interlink transfer function or the routing function To use these functions set a network module as a relay station Driver installation and updating Do not install or update the driver other than the method written in the troubleshooting Page 166 CHAPTER 16 in this manual The consistency between the driver and utility cannot be identified and
294. repair Is displayed next to the icon on the Device Manager screen or replace the personal computer lf the board does not operate normally on other personal computer replace the board If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to L Page 198 Section 16 8 2 is displayed next to the icon however the CC Link IE Field Network board is recognized normally Er x MELSEG CO Link IE Field Device e gt MELSEG CO Link IE Field Controller Point Do not uninstall or disable the driver of the board on the Device Manager when the board is normally recognized If it is uninstalled or disabled the operating system may shut down blue screen 188 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 7 7 Checking operations with event viewer Check the operations of the board with the Windows event viewer 1 For error events 256 l l 01001 during starting of the device the device computer failure is speculated Repair or change the personal computer was not able to be executed e If the error occurs on another personal computer replace the board e If any of the above actions do not solve the error reinstall the operating system e Restart the personal computer e Check the board installation condition gt Page 186 Section 16 7 2 33 258 Time out was detected while accessing e If the board OPERE normally on APGA personal computer the personal J 7 0102H ihe board computer failure is speculated Repair or change
295. ring time until instruction completion If the direction is not completed within the time it is resent for the number of resends specified by the Number of resends RIRD RIWT SWOOOB 0 10 seconds default value 1 to 360 1 to 360 seconds SWO009 Arrival monitoring time If a value outside the above settings is made operation is performed for RIRD RIWT 360 seconds If the Number of resends RIRD RIWT SWOOOB is set the time until the dedicated instruction fails is shown below Number of resends RIRD RIWT 1 x Arrival monitoring time RIRD RIWT If the instruction is not completed within the monitoring time specified by the Arrival monitoring time RIRD RIWT SWO0009 this specifies the number of times that the instruction is resent Number of resends SWO00B 0 Not resent default value RIRD RIWT SI7 MS Ja sibay Jeloeds yu y xIpueddy 1 to 7 1 to 7 times If a value outside the above settings is made the instruction is resent 7 times 237 Availability Number Description Master Local station station Specifies the slave stations where reserved station function disable or temporary error invalid station setting cancel is performed 0 Not specified 1 Specified b15 b14 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO swooro 1615 14 13 1211 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 swoort e temporary error invalid ever 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 74 70 69 68 67 66 65 swoos 1121
296. ription Master Local station station Stores the REMFR REMTO execution status for each channel SW0080 Channel 1 SW008B Channel 12 SW0096 Channel 23 SW0081 Channel 2 SW008C Channel 13 SW0097 Channel 24 SW0082 Channel 3 SW008D Channel 14 SW0098 Channel 25 SW0083 Channel 4 SW008E Channel 15 SW0099 Channel 26 SW0084 Channel 5 SW008F Channel 16 SWOO9A Channel 27 SW0080 l SW0085 Channel6 SW0090 Channel17 SW009B Channel 28 i Execution status O O SW0086 Ch I7 SW0091 Ch 118 W h 12 REMFR REMTO anne anne SW009C Channel 29 SWOO9F SW0087 Channel 8 SW0092 Channel 19 SWOO9D Channel 30 SW0088 SW0089 SWO008A Channel 9 Channel 10 Channel 11 SW0093 SW0094 SW0095 Channel 20 Channel 21 Channel 22 SWOO9E SWOO9F Channel 31 Channel 32 0 Normal completion 1 or higher Abnormal completion lt gt Page 199 Section 16 9 Stores the baton pass status for each station 0 Baton pass normal station 1 Baton pass faulty station e If multiple stations change from faulty to normal because they are reconnected to the network one by one per link scan the time until the status changes to 0 Baton pass normal station may vary by several seconds e If no response is received for one link scan the station is determined to be a baton pass faulty station b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO swooao fro se r e s s 2 Baton pass status 32 o 75 74 73 72 71 o se 6667 os 91 90 89 88 87 86 85
297. rs 0 ee eens 165 Precautions on Programming 165 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 166 Enor Example Serera 8 ay A see a ahh ara es Bi a acta aus ae oA 167 16 2 Troubleshooting for Installation Uninstallation 0 0 0 000 00 eee 169 16 21 Installaion taled a ia 169 16 22 Uninsta lato taled iia a heeded kad lade tad soe leachate dae NU es 169 16 2 3 Action displayed on the screen is not effective while installation 170 16 2 4 When the driver is not installed oooooooooononoo nono 173 Troubleshooting for Personal Computer and Utility o oo o 175 16 3 1 Personal computer does not start or shuts down 00000 cee eee 175 16 3 2 Utility does Not Startup 2 6 0 ccs veok a a beck deus 176 16 3 3 The screen or operation is abnormal 0 00 0000 ccc ce eee eas 176 16 3 4 Corrective action displayed on the screen is not effective ooooooo o 177 16 3 5 Personal computer operates Slowly 0 0 0 0 ccc ee eee ees 178 Troubleshooting for Board and Driver 0 0000 eee eee 178 16 4 1 Hardware error or board WDT error 2 0 een en eens 178 10A 2 DAVE WDT SO ae ole beg wae bem A ica due woke 179 16 43 Driver does Not stan mise tard tersa sd taba 179 16 44 BUSCO aii Riad 179 Troubleshooting for Data Link ooooooooorrrrraroraor eens 180 16 5 1 Communication error ERR LED is ON Flashing ooooooooronrono o o 180 16 5
298. s CPU module OFF All stations are in RUN or STEP RUN status ON Station in STOP or PAUSE status found If a station in STOP or PAUSE status is found the status of each station can CPU RUN status be checked by the CPU RUN status each station SWOOFO to SWOOF7 each station Depending on the timing of the link refresh the CPU RUN status each station SWOOFO to SWOOF7 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan SBOOFO Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores the RUN status of the master station s CPU module OFF RUN or STEP RUN status CPU RUN status ON STOP or PAUSE status SBOOF 1 master station Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF gt Stores the stop error status for each station OFF All stations normal ON Station with stop error found If a station with a stop error is found the status of each station can be checked by the CPU operation status each station 1 SW0100 to SW0107 CPU operation status NES SB0100 Cansat Depending on the timing of the link refresh the CPU operation status each O each station station 1 SW0100 to SW0107 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF p gt Stores the stop error status of the master station s CPU module OFF Normal CPU operation
299. s as the functions of Operation Test and Information Confirmation Set can be executed from the menus displayed by right clicking the icon E Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting In Selected Station Communication Test Cable Test Link Start Stop Network Event History Reserved Station Function Enable Enable Disable Ignore Station Errors The content of the displayed icons can be confirmed with the Legends button gt Page 149 Section 13 2 2 4 150 CHAPTER 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS b When a is displayed in Network Status lt The system does not contain a switching hub gt Although the loopback function is disabled the network is configured in ring topology Perform the following measures e When not using the loopback function Disconnect an Ethernet cable connected to any stations on the network either PORT1 or PORT2 The network topology will become a line topology and data link will start When using the loopback function Enable the loopback function and rewrite the network parameter to the board L gt Page 85 Section 5 8 When a master local module is used for the master station check if the master local module supports the loopback function If the master local module does not support the loopback function replace the module with the one which supports the loopback function lt The system contains a switching hub gt 42 is displayed by any of
300. s flashing the cyclic transmission of the board is stopped or communication route is consecutively built because the network communication route is unstable Check Is the master station connected to the network and operating normally Is the connected other station normal Are cables and wiring normal Is the loopback function set to be used on the master station Check for any of the following wiring conditions e Connecting both PORT1 and PORT2 to the switching hub e Although the loopback function is disabled the network is configured in ring topology e Although the loopback function is enabled the network is configured in star topology e The network is incorrectly configured in ring topology Isn t the station number duplicated with any of other stations Is the board hardware operating normally 194 Corrective action e If an error occurred on the master station solve the error e Check if the master station is performing data link with CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and perform the corrective action gt Page 144 Section 13 2 Check if the other station s power is turned ON e Check the cables and wiring gt Page 186 Section 16 7 3 e Perform a loop test gt Page 58 Section 4 7 1 e Perform a cable test gt Page 60 Section 4 7 2 Configure a ring topology without connecting the switching hub e Correct the wiring L gt Page 26 Section 2 2 e The system does not c
301. s required Adobe Reader can be downloaded from the Adobe Systems Incorporated web site duct e When using 64 bit version operating system the icon may not be displayed even when Adobe Reader is installed 88 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES Software package Version Manual name 22Y or earlier MELSEC Data Link Function HELP 23Z or later MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 1 10L or earlier MELSEC Data Link Function HELP 1 11M or later MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 1 11M or earlier MELSEC Data Link Function HELP 1 12N or later MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual SW1DNC CCIEF J 1 00A MELSEC Data Link Library Programmer s Reference 1 00A MELSEC Data Link Library Programmer s Reference SWODNC NETH B SW1DNC CCBD2 B SW1DNC NETG B SW1DNC CCIEF B 1 02C or later MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 1 Depending on the installation of other software packages the manuals shown above are also displayed In this case select the following manual LA MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 2 When SW1DNC CCIEF B Version 1 02C or later is installed MELSEC Data Link Library Programmer s Reference is deleted c Driver When installing the board on the personal computer after the installation of the software package the driver is installed automatically 1 For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 R2 the driver is required to be specified on the Fou
302. s setting status for Data Link Faulty Station Setting Input data status of SB007B dedi eiaaieciion OFF OFF or cleared to 0 y ON Hold Stores the own station s setting status for Output Setting during CPU STOP Hold clear status SO Setting for cpu stop OFF Hold ON Clear ALL OFF Stores the hardware test completion status OFF Not executed or execution in progress Hardware test SB0090 ON Completed completion status If completed the completion status can be checked by Hardware test normal abnormal end SB0091 Stores the hardware test normal completion or abnormal completion status OFF Normal completion Hardware test normal ON Abnormal completion SB0091 abnormal end Conditions e This is enabled when Hardware test completion status SB0090 is ON Stores the self loopback test completion status OFF Not executed or execution in progress Self loopback test SB0092 ON Completed completion status If completed the completion status can be checked by Self loopback test normal abnormal end SB0093 230 APPENDIX Availability Number Description Master Local station station Stores the self loopback test normal completion or abnormal completion status OFF Normal completion Self loopback test SB0093 ON Abnormal completion normal abnormal end Conditions e This is enabled when Self loopback test completion status SBO092 is ON Stores the loop test
303. s settings ea System and Security Review your computer s status Back up your computer Find and fix problems Network and Internet Gh Connect to the Internet E View network status and tasks Choose homegroup and sharing options Hardware and Sound View devices and printers Add a device Connect to a projector Adjust commonly used mobility settings Programs Ka Uninstall a program View by Category Y User Accounts and Family Safety Add or remove user accounts Set up parental controls for any user Appearance and Personalization Change the theme Change desktop background Adjust screen resolution Clock Language and Region it Change keyboards or other input methods Ease of Access Let Windows suggest settings Optimize visual display GO Control Panel System and Security gt C Panel ontrol Panel Hom Action Center y 5 Search Control Panel Open Control Panel Select System and Security REMARKS APPENDIX When using Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 select Classic View Select Administrative Tools Review your computer s status and resolve issues e System and Securi a gh Change User Account Control settings Troubleshoot common computer problems Network and Internet Restore your computer to an earlier time Hardware and Sound A 5 ae Windows Firewall Programs Check firewall status Allow a program through Windows Firewall
304. s target Station No Setting range 0 to 120 Multiple PLC Set the access target CPU CPU number in the multiple CPU system Redundant PLC Set the access target CPU system specification for the redundant system 2 Click the End button Screen button Clear button Clears all settings Check button Checks whether the settings are correct 120 CHAPTER 10 SETTING PARAMETERS 10 2 7 Routing parameters Set communication paths for transient transmission between a station in the own network and stations in other networks Display contents W View gt Network Parameter gt CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting screen c gt Routing Parameters button a Network Parameter CC JE Field Routing Information Setting AAA MEAR Relay Condition Setting of Relay Target Network No No Station No In Network System including the board of each Channel No please select presence on the MELSECNET 10 Network Channel No 181 NoMNET 10 MNET 10 Exists Channel No 182 C Channel No 183 Cf Channel No 184 Mol Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Set the target network number Numbers cannot be overlapped Target Network No Setting range 1 to 239 Set the first relay network number in the path to the target network Relay Network No Setting range 1 to 239 Set the first relay station number in the path to the target network Relay Station No Setting
305. shi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd Catalogs for cable are also available Also the connector processing of cable length is available for your preference Please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd Type Model manufacturer CC Link IE Field Network cable SC E5EW series Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd Cable types The following cable types are available depending on the operating environment e Standard type Cables for inside the control panel and indoor connection e L type Cables for outdoor connection Cables and relay adapters of flame retardant or waterproof type are also available Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd 2 4 2 Hubs Use hubs that meet the conditions listed below Operation is not guaranteed if the hubs do not meet these conditions e Compliance with the IEEE802 3 1000BASE T e Support of the auto MDI MDI X function e Support of the auto negotiation function salql9 lve sjuauodul0 JJOMISN Y Z e Switching hub layer 2 switch 4 A repeater hub is not available 1 Mitsubishi product Type Model name Industrial switching hub NZ2EHG T8 33 2 9 Operating Environment The following table shows the operating environment for the CC Link IE Field Network board Item Personal computer Required memory PCI bus specifications CPU PCI Express bus specifications Operating Eng
306. slave station ON Does the error occur on the Selected Station Communication Status Monitor screen in CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Corrective action Check the installation environment Page 186 Section 16 7 1 Check the LED and take corrective action in the case of LERR LED turned ON Page 195 Section 16 7 11 3 When an error occurred on PORT1 and PORT2 perform cable and self loopback tests 5 Page 53 Section 4 5 4 Page 60 Section 4 7 2 If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to L gt Page 198 Section 16 8 182 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 6 Troubleshooting for Device Access The following shows the troubleshooting when an error occurred in the network data link e Cyclic transmission cannot be performed Page 183 Section 16 6 1 e Transient transmission cannot be performed Page 184 Section 16 6 2 16 6 1 Cyclic transmission cannot be performed The following explains the troubleshooting when the following symptoms occurred and the cyclic transmission cannot be performed e The output of the own station does not reach the accessed station e The change of the input from the accessed station does not reach the own station e An unexpected value is set to the link device When cyclic data are not delivered to the master or a slave station check the following items Item Is the D LINK LED of the master or slave station ON In Network Configuration Setting
307. sonal computer Install oo CC Link IE Field Network board SW1DNC CCIEF B pueog WOMEN PIO 31 AUIT OD Bursn uoesnByuog wajs s z 25 2 2 Single Network System 1 Overall system configuration Single network system is a system that consists of a master station and slave stations connected by Ethernet cables as shown below Up to 120 slave stations and 1 master station can be connected Switching hub Ethernet cable 1000BASE T I l l l I I I I I l i a l l E ll l l ES l l l l l I J Master station Slave station 1 station Up to 120 stations 2 Network configuration The network can be wired into star topology line topology and ring topology A network can consist of a combination of star and line topologies but cannot consist of a combination of ring topology and star or line topology Line topology Ethernet cable i BA 1000BASE T gt 26 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Item Description The network is formed into a star with a switching hub Slave stations can be easily added by this topology Add slave stations one by one If multiple slave stations are added ata time all stations on the network are reconnected Therefore an error may momentarily occur in all the stations Star topology The connection between the board and modules using an Ethernet cable makes a line Line topolo oe topology For line topology connections are available
308. ss status ON Error SBO0A1 p O master station Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF 231 Number SBOOBO SB00B1 SB00CO SB00DO SBO0EO 232 Data link status each station Data link status master station Reserved station specification Error invalid station setting Temporary error invalid station status Availability Description Master Local station station Stores the cyclic transmission status for each station OFF Cyclic transmission for all stations in progress ON Cyclic transmission not executed for some stations If cyclic transmission are not executed for some stations the status of each station can be checked by Data link status each station SWOOBO to SWO0O0B7 Depending on the timing of the link refresh Data link status each station SWOOBO to SW00B7 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored Stores the cyclic transmission status for the master station OFF Normal ON Error Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF gt l Stores if there are any reserved stations OFF No reserved stations ON Reserved stations found If a reserved station is found the status of each station
309. ss to link devices During a link refresh data are assured for each station as shown below CC Link IE Field Network Board Driver Link device Data Station Station Data assurance No 1 No 1 assurance Data Station Station Data assurance No 2 No 2 assurance Link refresh Data Station Station Data assurance No 3 No 3 assurance Data Data assurance assurance CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS 9 2 4 Input status of data link error station setting Input data from the data link faulty station can be either cleared or held with the CC Link IE Field Network board Input data Range where the settings are enabled Input status in case of failure RX and RY Master station RX Clearing or holding the input data Local station RX and RY only the input data from other stations can be selected RWw and RWr Master station RWr The input data are held regardless of Local station RWw and RWr only the input data from other stations any setting Area for which Clear or Hold can be selected in the data link faulty station input status setting _ Area where data are held regardless of the setting i l Area that is dependent on the setting of the intelligent device station di eee ee ce l ee lle pea Station number 0 Master station Board Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 RY number 1 Station Station number 3 RWw number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 RWr number 1 Station number 2 St
310. st accept status ON Invalid accepted SB0010 is ON l _ Turns ON when the Temporary error invalid request accept status SB0058 is Temporary error invalid turned ON and the temporary error invalid processing is completed OFF Not completed ON Completed or error completion SB0059 setting completion status Turns ON when the Temporary error invalid setting cancel request SB0011 is Temporary error invalid accepted OFF Not accepted ON Cancel accepted SBOO5A setting cancel request accept status Turns ON when the Temporary error invalid setting cancel request accept Temporary error invalid status SBOO5A is turned ON and the temporary error invalid setting cancel SBOO5B setting cancel process is completed completion status OFF Not completed ON Completed or error completion Turns ON when the Reserved station function disable request SB0012 is accepted OFF Not accepted ON Cancel accepted Reserved station SBOO5C function disable request accept status Turns ON when the Reserved station function disable request accept status Reserved station SB005C is turned ON and disabling the reserved station function is SB005D function disable completed completion status OFF Not completed ON Completed or error completion 228 Number SB005E SB005F SB0060 SB0065 SB006A SB006B SB006C SB006D SBOO6E SBOO6F SB0072 Reserved station specification enable request a
311. stall the board to a slot on a personal computer y Fix the board Fix the board to a slot on the personal computer using the board fixing Screws y Power ON Power ON the personal computer 1 Precautions for turning on e Turn off the external power supply for the system in all phases before installing the board to or removing it from the personal computer Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the board to fail or UOHeI E SU y UOHE E SU I peog y E y malfunction 2 Precautions for installing the board e Fix the board by tighten the board fixing screws within the specified torque range Undertightening may cause drop of the component or wire short circuit or malfunction Overtightening may damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction For the tightening torque of the board fixing screws refer to the manual supplied with the personal computer e Before handling the board touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the board to fail or malfunction e Install the board to a personal computer which is compliant with PCI standard or PCI Express standard Section 2 5 Operating Environment Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction e Securely insert the board into the PCI slot following the board installation instruction of the personal computer Incorrect ins
312. stallation procedure 6 Perform the uninstallation 3 7 Ifthe utility cannot be uninstalled normally check if the personal computer has any problems a 5 e Operating Environment Page 187 Section 16 7 4 e Checking personal computer and operating system Page 187 Section 16 7 5 If any of the above troubleshooting do not solve the error refer to K Page 198 Section 16 8 169 16 2 3 Action displayed on the screen is not effective while installation The action when the screen is displayed is shown below 1 Using Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 7 Windows Server 2012 Windows 8 screens User Account Control Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it before a Setup exe Lee Unidentified Publisher gt Cancel I don t know where this program is from or what it s for gt Allow I trust this program I know where it s from or I ve used it before v Details User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer 5 170 By User Account Control Program name Setup exe Publisher Unknown File origin Hard drive on this computer Y Show details Yes No Change when these notifications appear For safety use of MELSEC Interface Board the power options of Windows will be changed as follows after installing Invalidating the sleep settings Changing the settin
313. station Is the parameter assignment range correct Is the link device accessed using a user program Is the link device accessed from a sequencer in the network Corrective action Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Page 196 Section 16 7 12 Check the Network Configuration Setting of the master station Page 112 Section 10 2 2 Check the argument of the communication function accessing to the link device Check the device range used in the sequence program 183 pauojlad aq JOUULD UOISSILUSUBI DIOAD 9 91 SS99IY SIN JO Bunooysa gnoJ 9 9 16 6 2 Transient transmission cannot be performed The following explains the troubleshooting when the following symptoms occurred and the transient transmission cannot be performed Example e Data cannot be written to the accessed station e Data from the accessed station cannot be read Monitoring cannot be performed with the utility e Data cannot be read written when accessing to device using a communication function of the user program When transient transmissions cannot be executed to the target station check the following items Item Is the D LINK LED of the master or slave station ON or flashing Is the baton passing status of the target station normal Is the station number of CC Link IE Field Network board duplicated with the station number of other station Is the Communication test 1 gt Page 6
314. station yu wufisse 9149p Yul pue mol amp ed 1Z S The status data of the driver are stored in the link devices RY RWw of the master station board by link refresh The status data of the link devices RY and RWw of the master station are stored in the link devices RY RWw of each slave station by link scan The status data of the link devices RY RWw of the slave station are output to the external device e Input from the slave station The status data of the external device are stored in the link devices RX RWr of the slave station The status data of the link devices RX RWr of the slave station are stored in the link devices RX RWr of the master station by link scan The status data of the link devices RX RWr of the master station board are stored in the driver by link refresh The status data of the driver are stored in the user program by MD function 65 2 Master and local stations Data can be written into the send range of each station s link device RY RWw and can be sent to any station on the same network The status data of the link devices RY RWw of the master station are stored in the link devices RX RWr of each local station The status data of the link devices RY RWw of local stations are stored in the link devices RX RWr of the master station and the link devices RY RWw of other local stations E E EAS s Personal computer Station number 0 1 Station numbe
315. station number has already been set e Check if no station number has been set for the target station of station number change e The target station of station number change does not exist e Check if no station number has been set for the target station of station number change e Correct the following settings at the request source of the dedicated instruction and retry the operation D240H Network number D241H Target station number D242H Command code D243H Channel used correct within the range e If the request source resides in another network check if the routing parameters are correctly set and take corrective action e Correct the transient data at the request source and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Correct the target station number at the request source of the dedicated instruction and retry the operation e If the request source resides in another network check if the routing parameters are correctly set and take corrective action e Correct the transient data at the request source and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and take action e Check i
316. ster function No standby master function is available in the CC Link IE Field Network board Slave station cut off function Data link status setting for error occurrence of CC Link module master The setting is fixed to Continue for CC Link IE Field Network station CPU 258 APPENDIX Appendix 8 Combinations with Existing Software There is no restriction when using CC Link IE Field Network board with other MELSEC interface boards or MELSOFT products on the same personal computer For the restrictions of the applicable operating environment or applicable A access target refer to the manual of each product 9JEMJOS BUNSIXA YM SUONBUIQUO y xIpueddy 259 Appendix 9 Checking Serial Number and Function Version This section explains a method for checking a serial number and a function version of CC Link IE Field Network board 1 Checking on the rating plate A serial number and a function version of CC Link IE Field Network board can be checked on the rating plate Serial no first 5 digits Function version 2 Checking on the CC Link Field utility A serial number and a function version can be displayed on the Board Diagnostics screen in the CC IE Field Utility Screen display KO Diagnostics gt Board Diagnostics Board Information Channel No 181 Model Mame QS1BD 37165F11 T2 Product 2122000000000048 Serial no first 5 digits Function version Point The serial n
317. ster station to the slave station with some exceptions for local stations Bit data that indicates the module or board operating status and data link status of CC Link IE Field Network 16 bit data word data that indicates the module or board operating status and data link status of CC Link IE Field Network Time required for the data sent by each station to rotate around the network The link scan time varies depending on the amount of data or transient transmission requests Data transfer between link devices of CC Link IE Field Network board and the driver Passing of a token to send data on the network A memory which is used to store data for communication between the CC Link IE Field Network board and the master local module Abbreviation for Reliability Availability and Serviceability A generic term used to describe the easy use of automated equipment Generic term for functions in MELSEC data link library Abbreviation for the watchdog timer that monitors the operation of network board Abbreviation for the watchdog timer that monitors the communication status between a network board and a personal computer or operating status of a personal computer 19 PACKING LIST The following items are included in the package of this product Before use check that all the items are included Q80BD J71GF11 T2 Before Using the Product Q80BD J71GF11 T2 CC Link IE Field Network Interface Board SW1DNC CCIEF B CC L
318. tBdEvent function Send source Own station CPU module Target station User application mdWaitBdEvent path eventno Channel 1 x Channel 1 e SEND mdReceiveEx path 0 255 Channel 2 Channel 2 Kea 1 Messages received from other stations are stored to a storage channel of the target station specified in the send source 2 Specified events are notified and the mdWaitBdEvent function completes normally At this time the received channel number is stored to the detailed event information of the mdWaitBdEvent function 3 Data of channel number notified by the mdWaitBdEvent function are read from the reception buffer using the mdReceiveEx mdReceive function Point When setting the event notification function set Without setting for Reception buffer of RECV function CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS c Operational change according to the setting of the RECV function e RECV execution request flag The following table shows the RECV execution request flag status of link special relay according to each setting 2 gt Page 224 Appendix 3 when receiving data from another station Reception RECV execution request flag when data Event setting of channel buffer of B from another station are received i that received data RECV function SB0030 SB0031 With setting Event setting is not applicable No change With event setting Without setting Without event setting Flag turns ON e When data are not
319. talled correctly If this screen is displayed when the installation is aborted click the Cancel button and close the screen Do not select Reinstall using recommended settings An incorrect module may be installed Click Install this driver software anyway screens Would you like to install this device software Name to Publisher MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Always trust software from MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Install Don tinstal CORPORATION Y You should only install driver software from publishers you trust How can I decide which device software is safe to install Unable to install SW1DNC CCIEF B because NET Framework 3 5 includes NET 2 0 and 3 0 is unchecked Please install SW1DNC CCIEF B again after checking the box on NET Framework 3 5 includes NET 2 0 and 3 0 Control Panel gt Programs gt Programs and Features gt Turn Windows features on or off Windows downloads required files connecting to Windows Update CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING procedure Confirm the publisher is MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION and click the button This screen may be displayed a couple of times The message is displayed when NET Framework 3 5 including NET 2 0 and 3 0 is set to disabled Reinstall the utility after searching the Turn Windows features on or off on the control panel and enabling the function of NET Framework 3 5 including NET 2 0 and 3 0 The proce
320. tarts after power on or Ethernet cable connection may vary Normally it takes a few seconds Depending on device status on the line a linkup process is repeated resulting in the increase in the time Stores the linkup status of PORT2 own station OFF Linkup in progress ON Linkdown in progress The time that the linkup starts after power on or Ethernet cable connection may vary Normally it takes a few seconds Depending on device status on the line a linkup process is repeated resulting in the increase in the time Stores if an error frame is received at the own station s PORT 1 OFF An error frame has not yet been received ON An error frame has been received Stores if an error frame is received at the own station s PORT2 OFF An error frame has not yet been received ON An error frame has been received Stores if an error frame was received from power on until the present at the own station s PORT 1 OFF An error frame has not yet been received ON An error frame has been received Stores if an error frame was received from power on until the present at the own station s PORT2 OFF An error frame has not yet been received ON An error frame has been received Stores the scan mode setting status OFF Asynchronous mode ON Synchronous mode APPENDIX Availability sn QS Aejay jeloeds yu xipuaddy Availability Number Description Master Local station station Operation status
321. tations higher than the maximum station number are ignored Stores the setting status of the reserved station 0 Other than reserved station also includes stations specified as reserved station disable status 1 Reserved station b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 swooce 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 9 7 6 54 2 2 1 swooc1 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 swooc2 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 swoocs 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 SWO0CO swooca 80 79 78 77 7e 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 to Nese vea sialon swoocs 96 es 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 a5 84 83 82 81 O swoocz SPeetication swoocs 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 104 100 99 98 97 swoocr gt t2o 19 118 117 m 115 114J113 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status each station SWO0AO to SWO0A7 e Stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored 246 APPENDIX Availability Number Description Master Local station station Stores the setting status of error invalid stations O Other than
322. tations selected in the list The following shows the symbols used in this manual with descriptions and examples Symbol Description Example Menu name on a menu bar Diagnostics lt lt gt gt Tab name on a screen lt lt Local Security Setting gt gt Item name on a screen CC IE Field Diagnostics Button on a screen Clear Refine Criteria button po Keyboard key Lct TERMS This manual uses the following terms unless otherwise specified Term CC Link IE Field Network board CC Link IE Controller Network board CC Link Ver 2 board MELSECNET H board SW1DNC CCIEF B CC IE Field Utility GX Developer GX Works2 CPU module Master local module Head module Ethernet adapter module Network module Intelligent function module Master station Local station Remote I O station Remote device station Intelligent device station Slave station Reserved station Relay station Cyclic transmission Transient transmission Data link Routing Dedicated instruction Reconnection Disconnection 18 Description Generic term for Q80BD 371GF11 T2 and Q81BD J71GF11 T2 CC Link IE Field Network interface board Generic term for Q80BD J71GP21 SX Q80BD J71GP21S SX Q81BD J71GP21 SX and Q81BD J71GP21S SX CC Link IE Controller Network interface board Generic term for Q80BD J61BT11N and Q81BD J61BT11 CC Link system master local interface board Generic term for Q80BD J71LP21 25 Q81BD J71LP21 25 Q80BD
323. ted value is set to the link device L Page 183 Section 16 6 1 1 e Check the user program when the access can be performed normally with Device Monitor Utility 197 siajsibas jerads Yul pue gs s ejal jeioeds yu Buopyuow YM snje s yIOMJOU BulydeYUD EVOL 16 8 Information Required for Inquiries When the troubleshooting cannot solve the problem or a board failure occurs please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative Inform the following conditions and situations when inquiring the problems 1 Product information Item Condition Situation Reference Model Q80BD J71GF 11 1T2 Q81BD J71GF11 T2 Board Rating plate Page 260 Appendix 9 Product Product information version Version Personal Manufacturer Example Intel Core 2 Duo Processor 3GHz Personal computer Operating Example Windows XP Professional Page 34 Section 2 5 system If exist type the number of boards and so on Other Existence option Situation checked with disconnecting other option boards boards 2 Failure content Item Condition Situation Example The LINK LED does not turn on even though the computer is turned on Failure description Occurrence frequency If the failure occurs only in the specific case inform the occurrence condition noticed Occurrence condition Inform the following descriptions e The result of troubleshooting performed e The sit
324. tem configuration installation wiring settings functions programming and troubleshooting for MELSEC Q series CC Link IE Field Network master local modules Overview of the CC Link IE Field Network and specifications procedures before operation system configuration installation wiring settings functions programming and troubleshooting for MELSEC L series CC Link IE Field Network master local modules Specifications procedures before operation system configuration installation wiring settings and troubleshooting for head module Specifications procedures before operation system configuration installation wiring settings and troubleshooting for Ethernet adapter module Programming function specifications and sample programming for MELSEC data link library MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual is stored on the CD ROM of the software package in a PDF file format Manuals in printed form are sold separately for a single purchase Order a manual by quoting the manual number model code listed in the above table CONTENTS SARE IGP RECAU TIONS i corer ketenes ce ersten ce E ee ALA bt OIE Gaye Recent aaa eee ari 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FORTHE PRODUCTA eter ere ea Rees eo 6 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE a Sorte neler ur rea O ite een einen oh a ee 7 INTRODUC HON Ea eee a ag eet oe MCR E ce sume ee a eee ea Ogee See Korat ae Cenc ayer se a 8 RELATED NINE a es gee A Career eee 9 ROW TO WSE TS NAICS LS ae ee ape chose are a ae
325. than 0 request from the network module was detected path ae oe switching may have been executed eure gt 1 Even if SM1600 is ON path switching does not occur when the CPU is not accessed via the tracking cable 2 When using SM1600 SD1590 and SD1690 to estimate the occurrence of path switching for the Redundant CPU connected via MELSECNET H check the following items on the Redundant settings in the network parameter of GX Developer e Issue system switch in Cable disconnection timeout e Issue system switch in communication error Check the following based on the statuses of the above special relay and special registers and remove the error Cause e Check the Redundant CPU for an error e Check the tracking cable status and whether the tracking cable is correctly connected e Check both the relevant network module and the network where that relevant network module is connected for an error 215 wajs s dD JUepunpay Buissedoy 104 suonnesalg xipuaddy c Access examples of path switching The following shows examples of path switching during access to the control system lt Figure 1 When system switching occurs due to communication error gt CC Link IE Field Network module MELSECNET H module Standby system Connection to the control system Personal computer CC Link IE Field 2 Tracking cable Network board CC Link IE Field Network modul
326. the CC Link IE Field Network status of a selected board Target station by CC IE Field Utility for the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics is as follows Station type Board Module Model name CC Link IE Field Network board CM TE do sei Q81BD J71GF11 T2 Local station Master local module QJ71GF11 T2 Intelligent device Head module LJ72GF15 T2 station Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF ETB 13 2 1 Selecting the diagnostics target The following explains the target selection for CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics The entire network status can be checked by connecting CC IE Field Utility to a master station However when a local station status cannot be checked because of a failure such as a cable disconnection connect the utility to a local station directly 1 Selecting diagnostics target board When two or more CC Link IE Field Network boards are installed to a personal computer the Select Diagnostics Destination screen as shown below is displayed before starting diagnostics Select a board to be diagnosed and click the UK button CC IE Field Diagnostics Select Diagnostics Destination Board Selection 3 Board 1 Channel No 181 Network No 1 Master Station Station No 0 Board 2 Channel No 182 Network No 1 Local Station Station No 1 Cancel 2 Changing diagnostics target board To change a board to be diagnosed during the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics click the _ Change Board button on the CC IE Fiel
327. thod Link refresh is executed at the interval of time set for Link refresh cycle on the Driver setting screen of CC IE Field Utility 2 gt Page 119 Section 10 2 5 Link refresh time can be checked on the Board Diagnostics screen 2 gt Page 142 Section 13 1 Point O The link refresh may not be executed in the set cycle because of such factors described below e Performance of the personal computer CPU e Number of set refresh points e Number of installed CC Link IE Field Network boards e Other running applications e Other running boards O If the link refresh time exceeds the link refresh cycle set on the Device setting screen perform any of the following measures e Extend the link refresh cycle gt Page 119 Section 10 2 5 O Ifthe shortened link refresh time effects the operation of the applications perform the following measure e Extend the link refresh cycle gt Page 119 Section 10 2 5 68 CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS 5 2 3 Assurance of cyclic data integrity The cyclic data integrity can be assured in 32 bit units or for each station 1 32 bit data assurance The RWw and RWr data can be assured in 32 bit units a Setting method Disable Block Data Assurance per Station on the Supplementary Setting screen in Network Configuration Setting gt Page 114 Section 10 2 2 1 To enable 32 bit data assurance disable Block Data Assurance per Station CC IE Field Supplementary Se
328. thod This section explains a method for selecting a monitoring method in Device Monitor Utility 12 3 1 Batch monitoring devices Batch monitor devices whose type is specified on the Device Setting screen Screen display W Menu gt Batch monitor lt Bit devices gt lt Word devices gt oo co CO o mb o o oo vcd cc co co co OO co Co oO 0 0 9000 090 0 0 0O a 0 0 amp oo co coco co co co 0 OO CO 0 0 0 oo i oa a iara i oa oo oo 0 0 oo occ co CO mocmcCo oO CoO CO CO 0 0 oo co co co co co co coco OOOO Oo 00 0 0 0000 ao aoa oo oo oo a 0 000000000 Display contents Item Description Device information Display the current device status Display the monitoring target device names Display the monitoring result of each device Monitoring result e For bit device 0 OFF 1 ON e For word devices Values in set display format 7 Page 139 Section 12 7 Screen button e button Scrolls the display area saoInap Bulloyuouw yoeg L EZL poyan Buoyuoyy Bunoajes EZL 133 12 3 2 Monitoring registered 16 point devices Monitor devices by specifying different types of devices in units of 16 points This function can monitor a maximum of five different types of bit devices and one type of word devices simultaneously The displayed information of devices is the same as that of the batch monitor function Scree
329. thod Broadcast polling Token passing method Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment Intelligent 32 points 4 These are values in remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode 201 b Hardware specifications Specifications Item CC Link Ver 2 board CC Link IE Field Network board Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Q80BD J71GF11 T2 Q81BD J71GF11 T2 PCI bus slot PCI Express slot Installation slot PCI slot PCI Express slot PCI X slot Standard Low profile 121 H x 121 H x 80 H x External dimensions 121 H x 19 W x 153 D mm 18 5 W x 18 5 W x 18 5 W x 181 D mm 181 D mm 181 D mm Weight 0 11kg 0 11kg 0 08kg 0 07kg 2 Functional comparison a Added functions The following are the functions added in the CC Link IE Field Network This mode can be selected for optimizing the performance of cyclic transmission based on the frequencies of cyclic transmission and Page 111 Section transient transmission 10 2 1 The mode can be selected from Online Normal mode and Page 256 Appendix 6 Online High speed mode Cyclic Mode selection for transmission cyclic transmission Setting the routing parameters beforehand also enables transient transmission to stations in different networks Communication is also possible with the CC Link IE Controller Network and MELSECNET H Transient Seamless transmission fa Page 74 Section 5 3 2 transmission with different networks Network c
330. tion It is only possible to view the list of stations ignoring errors Settings made using this function will remain in effect until the master station sub master station is turned OFF or reset At that time all stations will be restored to their original state according to parameters in the master station Ignore Station Error List 1 r Legend Operation Method Normal station 15 Ignoring station 115 Ignoring errors based 55 Unassigned station number errors on parameters Not selectable Not selectable Operation Method 1 Set a station to temporarily ignore station errors by clicking the appropriate station number box 2 Click the apply OK button to reflect the changes 15 Will be set to ignore Ignore station errors will be station errors disabled oo Cancel Operating procedure 1 Select stations to be set restored as temporary error invalid stations from Error Invalid Station List 2 Click the button The temporary error invalid stations are set restored When the process is completed the contents of Error Invalid Station List are updated Point O Stations to Station for which temporary error invalid station setting cannot be configured When reservation for a slave station is temporarily canceled temporary error invalid station setting cannot be configured for the station O An error invalid station is used in line topology In the following cases the station is n
331. tion Setting and retry the cable test Network No error in transient D21DH e Transient data that is not applicable to a different network were received Correct data the network number or target station number at the request source and retry the operation e The communication test cannot be executed with the relay station s specified Correct Communication Destination Setting and then execute the Target station No error in communication test again transient data e Transient data of the application type that is not executable for the own station D21EH were received Correct the application type or target station number at the request source and retry the operation e The SEND instruction is not applicable to head modules Target station type error D21FH l i e Modify the program so that the SEND instruction will not be used for head dedicated instruction modules 201 Error code D220H D222H D223H D22EH D22FH D230H D231H D232H D240H to D243H D244H D245H D246H D247H D248H 202 No master station Transient data request error Transient error Station No setting not available for the target station No baton pass for the target station Incorrect station No specified Station No already set for the target station Station No setting target not exist Target network module failure dedicated instruction Incorrect transient data Target station
332. tion Version oooooooooo 260 Appendix 10 New and Improved Functions o o o o ccc eee ene 261 Appendix 10 1 Change of hardware functi0N lt o oooooooo o ooo os 261 Appendix 10 2 Update of software package o oooooooooooono o 261 Appendix 11 Windows Warning Message 000 cece ee ee eee eee ee eeneeeeeeeas 261 Appendix 11 1 Overview of warning message 6 2 ee ee 261 Appendix 11 2 Methods for preventing warning message 2 00 ee ee eee eee 262 Appendix 12 Behavior When Personal Computer Enters Power Save Mode or Fast Startup 268 Appendix 12 1 Behavior when the personal computer enters the power save mode Gtandby MIDSINale arnt ents eS tose ra tit a Bet se Gade ake ate 2 268 Appendix 12 2 Behavior when the personal computer enters the power save mode hibernate sleep eas a heated wake eat eae A a aa tee a 269 Appendix 12 3 Behavior when fast startup function is enabled 270 Appendix 13 MELSECPowerManager 0000 ccc cette eee eee eee ee eens 211 Appendix 13 1 Installing MELSECPowerManager 0 00 eee eee eee eee 2 1 Appendix 13 2 Uninstalling MELSECPowerManager 0000 ee eee eee eee 2 1 Appendix 13 3 Checking MELSECPowerManager 0 0c eee eee eee eee 2 2 Appendix 14 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 0 0 0 eee ee eee 274 Measures to comply with the EMC Directive Measures to comply with the Low
333. tion numbers and retry the operation e Check if the routing parameters are correctly set and take corrective action e Transient data transmission addressed to the own station was requested Check the network number and target station number and retry the operation e Check if the routing parameters are correctly set and take corrective action e Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected properly e Exchange the cables between PORT1 and PORT 2 of the request source and retry the operation e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation e Write the network parameters to the board again e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Set the link scan mode to asynchronous or cancel the constant link scan time setting e Refer to corrective action for hardware error gt Page 210 1 in this section e Correct the link device size of slave station s and retry the operation D611H to D612H RWw D613H to D614H RWr D615H to D616H RY D617H to D618H RX e Write the network parameters to the board again e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING e Correct the link device offset or size of slave station s and retr
334. tion on the same network Using MELSEC data link library the programmable controllers of other stations and the buffer memory of the intelligent function module installed with the head module can be accessed gt Page 164 CHAPTER 14 1 Setting method Use the MELSEC data link library function MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 2 Transient transmission range It is possible to communicate with all stations on the network UOISSILISUB JUSISUBI E G yIOMJOU aules ay uo UOHeDIUNWWOD e g 13 5 3 2 Communication with different networks Setting the routing parameters in utility beforehand enables transient transmission to stations on different networks Seamless communication is also possible with the CC Link IE Controller Network MELSECNET H CC Link IE Controller Network Network No 1 Set the communication route by routing parameters in advance 4 Network Parameter CC IE Field Routing Informa pana Target Network Relay Network Relay No Po Station Ma aa aa Relay station Network No 2 CC Link IE Field Network 1 Setting method For Routing parameters set on the Setting the CC IE Field Routing Information lt gt Page 121 Section 10 2 7 2 Transient transmission range For Multiple network system communication with a station on up to the eighth network is possible by setting routing parameters uy BE up i ae 2 uy
335. tions Error Occurs 4 Legends Screen button e legends button Displays the explanation for icons displayed on the diagnostics screen Station Type Master Local Sub master Station L series Master Local Sub master Station A Q series Intelligent Device Station Communication head module CC Link IE Field Intelligent Device Station Ethernet adapter module Other Modules Es Background Color For Station Type Light Blue Reserved Station Yellow Errors Temporarily Being Ignored Orange Reserved Station Disabled Activated Grey Network Interface Board Errors Always Ignored Sub Master Station for Master Station Status E Error Data link stopped Disconnected Station Error Minor Selected Station Error Moderate Module Error Display an error icon at the right of station icon PLC Error Error Parameter Display an error icon at the left of station icon Error Station Type Mismatch A A O Error major y y 2 Station No Unassigned 42 Error Illegal loop connection detected Cable Status Error Point O Station type display of the icon When modules other than the target of the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Page 144 Section 13 2 are used in a local station it is displayed as Other Modules 149 usalos sonsoubelp BulAejdsid ZZ MIOMION PI 4 31 AUINT 90 Buisoubeig ze 5 Network configuration CC Link IE Field Netw
336. to the power line is measured 0 5 to 30MHz QP 73dB Mean 60dB CISPR16 2 3 The electromagnetic wave which the TAN product emits to the external space is Radiated emission measured 1 CISPR16 2 1 CISPR16 1 2 1 Conducted emission The tests were conducted installed in a control panel QP Quasi Peak value Mean Average value APPENDIX b Immunity requirements Standard Test description Value specified in standard EN61000 4 2 Electrostatic discharge An electrostatic discharge is applied e 8kV Air discharge l Be to the enclosure of the equipment e 4kV Contact discharge immunity EN61000 4 3 80 AM modulation 1kHz Radiated radio frequency An electric field is radiated to the e 80 to 1000MHz 10V m electromagnetic field product e 1 4 to 2 0GHz 3V m immunity e 2 0 to 2 7GHz 1V m EN61000 4 4 o l l RES power I O power and AC I O Fastransi nt burs urst noise is applied to power lines unshielded lines 2kV as and signal lines e DC I O analog and communication immunity as lines 1kV e AC power AC I O power and AC I O unshielded lines 2kV CM 1kV DM EN61131 2 2007 EN61000 4 5 Lightning surge is applied to power e DC power and DC I O power lines Surge immunity lines and signal lines 0 5kV CM 0 5kV DM e DC I O AC I O shielded analog and communication lines 1kV CM EN61000 4 6 High frequency noise is applied to 0 15 to 80MHz 80 AM modulation Conducted RF immunity
337. ts Turn User Account Control On or Off v 49 Search 2 e A Turn on User Account Control UAC to make your computer more secure User Account Control UAC can help prevent unauthorized changes to your computer We recommend that you leave UAC turned on to help protect your computer F Use User Account Control UAC to help protect your computer o Cancel y Setting completed APPENDIX Select User Accounts Select Turn User Account Control on or off Clear Use User Account Control UAC to help protect your computer and click the ox _ button 263 obBessau Bulusem BulusAdid Jo SPOYISIN ZL xIpuaddy oBbessayy Buluse A sMOpulIM LL xipueddy b Using Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 20012 Windows 8 1 Open Control Panel Getting Started E3 Connectto a Projector Q Snipping Tool lt A XPS Viewer ey Windows Fax and Scan Computer ol Panel and Printers A Remote Desktop Connection Default Programs Au Magnifier Help and Support gt All Programs Search programs and files p Shut down ii 2 Select System and Security exa Control Panel Adjust your computer s settings View by Category Y Review your computer s status Add or remove user accounts Back up your computer Set up parental controls for any user Find and fix problems es System and Security User Accounts and Family Safety i Appearance
338. tting Link Scan Mode Setting Constant Scan ms Loopback Function Setting Use Please build network configuration ring configuration that the end stations of Line Connection are connected to each other Clear the check box b Access to cyclic data When accessing link refresh target devices the integrity of the 32 bit data can be assured by accessing RWw and RWr with the following conditions satisfied e Start device number of RWw RWr is a multiple of 2 e The number of points assigned to RWw RWr is a multiple of 2 Point For data assurance of more than 32 bits use the block data assurance per station or interlock programs UOISSILUSUBI DMI D Z S AysGejul eyep 21949 Jo SDUBINSSY Z S 69 70 2 Block data assurance per station Integrity of the cyclic data is assured for each station by handshaking between the driver and the CC Link IE Field Network board for a link refresh a Setting method Enable Block Data Assurance per Station on the Supplementary Setting in Network Configuration Setting L gt Page 114 Section 10 2 2 1 Once this setting is enabled on the master station integrity of the data for all stations is assured for each station CC IE Field Supplementary Setting Link Scan Mode Setting Loopback Function Setting f Use Please build network configuration ring configuration that the end stations of Line Connection are connected to each other b Acce
339. tus Add or remove user accounts Back up your computer a Set up parental controls for any user Find and fix problems Appearance and Personalization Network and Internet Change the theme Connect to the Internet Change desktop background View network status and tasks Adjust screen resolution Choose homegroup and sharing options Clock Language and Region Hardware and Sound ral E Change keyboards or other input methods View devices and printers Change display language Add a device Ease of Access Programs Let Windows suggest settings Uninstall a program Optimize visual display 2 Select Administrative Tools Control Panel Home Acton Center System and Security Review your computer s status and resolve issues is Change User Account Control settings Troubleshoot common computer problems Restore your computer to an earlier time Network and Internet Fee nace and Sound Pg Windows Firewall f Check firewall status Allow a program through Windows Firewall Programs User Accounts and Family Ba System g Safety View amount of RAM and processor speed Check the Windows Experience Index A Allow remote access See the name of this computer Device Manager ppearance and Personalization Windows Update Clock Language and Region Turn automatic updating on or off Check for updates View installed updates Ei FA i ase of Access Power Options Require a password when the computer wakes Change wh
340. twork module Name Status Description Operating normally RUN One of the following error has occurred OFF e A hardware failure or a board WDT error has occurred e The driver is not started One of the following error has occurred e An error was detected in all stations ON e Modules with same station number exist on the network e A network parameters is corrupted ERR e The network parameter does not match the installation Reserved station specification number of connected stations network number etc a Flashing A data link error station is detected A i OFF Operating normally z SD n OFF Data not sent Receiving data RD OFF Data not received b When the RUN LED is flashing An error which is peculiar to boards has occurred Name Status Description One of the following error has occurred RUN Flashing Check ERR LED and RD LED ERR PCI bus PCI Express bus error has occurred RD Driver WDT error has occurred c When checking channel number The status is displayed as shown below according to the current channel number while opening the Channel No Setting screen lt gt Page 124 Section 11 1 lt 181 gt lt 182 gt lt 183 gt lt 184 gt ERR SD ERR SD ERR SD ERE SD RUN RD RUN aD RUN ED RUN aD as 45 46 2 Connector The PORT1 and PORT2 connector for CC Link IE Field Network RJ45 connector LERLED LINK LED a RJ45 connector Connect an Ethernet cable gt
341. uation when checking with other boards or computers Example Event ID 295 The Board WDT error had occurred error is displayed on the event viewer when the personal computer is started It also occurs when mounting the problem board with another computer Other boards Troubleshooting mounted with the computer works properly result 198 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 6 9 Error Code List The following lists the error codes For error codes which are not listed in this section refer to the following manual MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual MELSEC Q CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual If the error still occurs after the corrective action please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative For information required for inquiries refer to gt Page 198 Section 16 8 Error code p Error Corrective action DOOOH to DOOFH e Refer to corrective action for hardware error gt Page 210 1 in this section DO10H to DO13H e Correct the points assigned to the link devices DO14H to DO16H e Refer to corrective action for hardware error gt Page 210 1 in this section DO18H e Correct the constant link scan time DO19H to DO20H e Refer to corrective action for hardware error Page 210 1 in this section DO30H to DO35H e Correct the wiring condition DO36H e Refer to corrective action for hardware error gt Page 210 1 in this section DO37H e Check the number of connected
342. ulas for the transmission delay time 1 Master station RX lt Slave station input The following table shows the time after a signal is input to the slave station until the board device of the master station turns ON or OFF Calculation value calculation formulas Normal value SM x 0 5 LS x 1 slave station response time ms Maximum value SMx1 LS x2 slave station response time ms SM Master station link refresh time LS Link scan time 2 Master station RY Slave station output The following table shows the time after the board device is turned ON or OFF until the output of the slave station is turned ON or OFF Calculation value calculation formulas Normal value SM LS x 1 slave station response time ms Maximum value SM LS x 2 slave station response time ms SM Master station link refresh time LS Link scan time au Buissa9doly G Xipuaddy aun ejep uoissiwusues gG xipueddy 255 Appendix 6 Differences in Cyclic Transmission Modes This section explains the differences between Online Normal Mode and Online High Speed Mode for the CC Link IE Field Network board Refer to the information in this section to select Online Normal Mode and Online High Speed Mode 1 Differences in performance specifications The following items can be selected Item Online Normal mode Online High speed mode Maximum number of RWw send points per local station 1024 points 2048 bytes 2
343. umber of connected stations Station type check Loopback check 1 Executing loop tests Description Check if master stations on the network are duplicated Check if stations on the network are duplicated Check if slave stations exceeding the number of slave stations set for the master station are connected Check if specified reserved stations are actually connected Consistency check for the number of total slave stations set by parameters and actual connected slave stations Consistency check for the station type of slave stations set in master stations and actual connected station type Detect if loopback is being performed while Use is set for Loopback Function Setting in the Network Parameter screen for the master station The following explains a procedure for loop test assuming the executing station master station is the CC Link IE Field Network board and the target station local station as the CC Link IE Field Network module Point The loop test can be executed only when the CC Link IE Field Network board is the master station When it is the local station execute the test from the master station in the network system to which the local station is connected a Preparing loop tests Prepare the following before loop test 1 Check for the power discontinuity Turn OFF the personal computer Turn OFF the module 2 Cable connection Comnect Ethernet cables to each station 3 Turn ON Turn
344. umber displayed on the Board Diagnostics screen in the CC IE Field Utility may differ from that on the rating plate of the CC Link IE Field Network board O The serial number on the rating plate of the CC Link IE Field Network board indicates the management information of the product O The serial number displayed in the Board Diagnostics screen in the CC IE Field Utility indicates the functional information of the product The functional information of the product is updated when a new function is added 260 APPENDIX Appendix 1 ONew and Improved Functions Appendix 10 1 Change of hardware function There is no new and improved functions related to the hardware version Appendix 10 2 Update of software package For details of the update version software and the functions which are added or changed please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Appendix 11 Windows Warning Message Appendix 11 1 Overview of warning message When using an operating system with the user account control function a warning message appears when the utility is activated gt Page 94 Section 8 1 a E 6 i User Account Control E User Account Control x Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it before Program name CCIEFUTL exe z l CCIEFUTL exe Publisher Unknown Unidentified Publisher File origin Network drive ore I don t know where this program is from or what it s for Y
345. uring system switching E Functions that result in error by system switching mdDevSetEx mdDevRstEx mdRandREx mdRandWEx mdReceiveEx MELSEC data link library mdSendEx mdControl mdDevRst mdDevSet mdRandR mdRandW mdReceive mdSend mdTypeRead 213 wals s Nd juepunpay Buissso0Vy 104 suonnealg xipuaddy b Error occurrence The following example gives a flowchart for error occurrence at batch write Write processing mdSend instruction etc Check the error code Does the error require retry processing NO YES Retry processing Execute normal processing 1 For details and corrective action of the error code refer to the following manual _ QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 2 Execute retry processing as required depending on the system specifications 4 Automatic switching of communication path When a communication error occurs during access to the Redundant CPU connected via MELSECNET H the communication path is automatically switched to continue access to the control system Hereinafter this automatic switching of the communication path is referred to as path switching The following describes the path switching conditions checking method of path switching occurrence and access examples of path switching a Path switching conditions When access is being processed under the following conditions access to the Redundant CPU is conti
346. uy 8 z L WIOMION PIP 4 31 AUN 909 Bulsoubeig Zep CHAPTER 14 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY 164 This chapter explains the features of the functions provided by the library These functions are used when creating a user program to communicate with a programmable controller CPU With these functions a user can communicate without being aware of hardware types or communication protocols on the target The following table shows the list of MD functions which are provided with the software package Function name Description mdOpen Open a communication line mdClose Close a communication line Batch write devices Extended function mdSendEx Send data SEND function Extended function Batch read devices Extended function mdReceiveEx Receive data RECV function Extended function mdRandWEx Write devices randomly Extended function mdRandREx Read devices randomly Extended function mdDevSetEx Set a bit device Extended function mdDevRstEx Reset a bit device Extended function mdTypeRead Read the type of programmable controller CPU mdControl Remote operation of RUN STOP PAUSE mdWaitBdEvent Wait for an event occurrence mdBdRst Reset the own board mdBdModSet Set the mode of the own board mdBdModRead Read the mode of the own board mdBdLedRead Read the LED information of the own board mdBdSwRead Read the switch status of the own board mdBdVerRead Read the version information of the own boa
347. ve station during data link for instance ee Event conditions are checked every link scan and if the event Page 84 Section 5 7 Event notification to program R lt conditions are met notifies events to the user program Page 117 Section 10 2 4 This function monitors the operation of the software operating Driver WDT function ae Page 86 Section 5 9 system driver inside the hardware 64 CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS 5 2 Cyclic Transmission Data communication is available periodically among stations on the same network Link devices RX RY RWw and RWr are used 5 2 1 Data flow and link device assignment 1 Master and slave stations except for local stations One to one communication is possible between the master and slave stations The status information of the link devices RY RWw of the master station is output to the external device of the slave station and the input status information from the external device of the slave station is stored in the link devices RX RWr of the master station Master station Slave station Board Station Station number 1 number 1 Station Station number 2 number 2 11 11 11 11 11 RX RWr 11 11 11 11 11 11 e External device RY RWw Station number 2 MI Area for sending to other stations The status data of the user program are stored in the driver by MD function S External device uoISSIWSUEJL DMI D Z S e Output from the master
348. ven if cyclic transmission was stopped by link stop it will be restarted by resetting the board or powering off and then on the system Station where link start cannot be performed Link start cannot be performed in the following cases Station where cyclic transmission was stopped due to an error Station where link was stopped by a command from another station Station where link was stopped by link special relay SB or link special register Sw 1 Selecting Forced Link Start will start the link ED shows useful rm information Cyclic transmission can be started and stopped with link special relay SB and link special register SW L3 Page 223 Appendix 3 Page 235 Appendix 4 71 Ex shows setting or operating examples CC Link IE Field Network Network No 1 Master station Request source Request target Station Station No 2 No 3 For the accessible devices and ranges of CC Link IE Field Network board refer to the following manual shows ELSEC Datalink Library Programmer s Reference reference pages 16 Pages are organized as shown below to describe the utility functions 14 2 4 cable test Test the status of the cable connections between the testing station and the devices connected to the ports of the testing_station Screen display Screen display Describes the Screen display W Diagnostics gt CC IE Field Diagnostics procedure gt CC IE Field Diagnostics screen gt
349. wing shows the troubleshooting for error for the functions e Hardware error or board WDT error Page 178 Section 16 4 1 e Driver WDT error 5 Page 179 Section 16 4 2 e Driver does not start 1 gt Page 179 Section 16 4 3 e Bus error 1 gt Page 179 Section 16 4 4 1 6 4 1 Hardware error or board WDT error When the hardware error or board WDT error occurred check the following items Item Corrective action Is the board installed properly e Check the board installation status Page 186 Section 16 7 2 Does the board operate on other personal e After formatting the HD install the operating system again computer e Repair or replace the personal computer If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to L gt Page 198 Section 16 8 178 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 6 4 2 Driver WDT error When the driver WDT error occurred check the following items Item Corrective action Has the error occurred due to the system e Reset the board Page 127 Section 11 4 overload temporarily e Restart the personal computer e Remove the factor of system overload e Disable the driver WDT function or increase the driver WDT monitoring time 5 Page 119 Section 10 2 5 Is the same error occurred repeatedly Is the system overloaded constantly 1 A driver WDT error may occur when the system is overloaded temporarily due to the following factors e Windows start processing at the personal computer startup
350. wn station SB0047 is OFF Stores the current value of the link scan time during cyclic transmission The stored value contains a maximum error of 1 ms Unit ms SW0062 Current link scan time p Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores the setting value of the contact link scan that is set in the supplementary setting 0 No setting Constant link scan set 1 to 200 Setting value of contact link scan time Unit ms SW0063 value Conditions e This is enabled when the Data link status own station SB0049 is OFF 242 APPENDIX Availability Number Description Master Local station station Stores the connection status of own station 00H Normal communication in progress on PORT1 and PORT2 01H Normal communication in progress on PORT1 cable disconnected on PORT2 04H Normal loopback communication in progress on PORT1 cable disconnected on PORT2 Normal cable disconnected on PORT1 communication in progress Connection status own on PORT2 SW0064 l l station Disconnecting cable disconnected on PORT1 and PORT2 x Disconnecting cable disconnected on PORT1 establishing line on PORT2 Disconnecting establishing line on PORT1 cable disconnected on PORT2 Disconnecting establishing line on PORT1 and PORT2 Normal cable disconnected on PORT1 loopback communication in progress on PORT2 SWO066 Actual
351. y the operation D61BH RWw D61CH RWr D61DH RY D61EH RX DG1FH CCPASET execution error Erase the neo parameter settings select Write to PLC and execute the CCPASET instruction again e Check the transient data at the request source and retry the operation Parameter error Overlapping of D61BH to D61EH l the device D620H Incorrect transient data e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Write the network parameters again e Correct the network parameters and retry the operation D622H Number of total slave stations error D621H to D62CH Parameter error D624H Constant link scan time setting error D625H Block data assurance per station setting error D628H Station type error D629H Station No range error The system failed to start data link due to any of the following causes Remove the cause of the problem and retry the operation e No station number setting e Own station error e Master station duplication e Station type mismatch D62DH Failed to start data link a e Invalid station number of the own station Duplication of the own station number e Own station specified as reserved station e Parameter error e Parameters being sent e Parameters not received Only the master station and no slave stations exist e Link stop instruction m e Specify the network number station type

CC-Link IE Field Network Interface Board User's Manual(For

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents